Gryphon™ Family
General Purpose Handheld
Linear Imager or Laser Bar Code Readers
Gryphon I GD4100/GM4100
Gryphon BT4100/ L GD4300
Product Reference Guide
Datalogic ADC, Inc.
959 Terry Street
Eugene, OR 97402
USA
Telephone: (541) 683-5700
Fax: (541) 345-7140
©2011-2016 Datalogic, Inc.
An Unpublished Work - All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this documentation or
the procedures described therein may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means without prior written permission of Datalogic ADC, Inc. or its subsidiaries or affiliates
("Datalogic" or “Datalogic ADC”). Owners of Datalogic products are hereby granted a nonexclusive, revocable license to reproduce and transmit this documentation for the purchaser's own internal business purposes. Purchaser shall not remove or alter any proprietary notices, including copyright notices, contained in this documentation and shall ensure
that all notices appear on any reproductions of the documentation.
Should future revisions of this manual be published, you can acquire printed versions by
contacting your Datalogic representative. Electronic versions may either be downloadable
from the Datalogic website (www.datalogic.com) or provided on appropriate media. If you
visit our website and would like to make comments or suggestions about this or other Datalogic publications, please let us know via the "Contact Datalogic" page.
Disclaimer
Datalogic has taken reasonable measures to provide information in this manual that is
complete and accurate, however, Datalogic reserves the right to change any specification at
any time without prior notice.
Datalogic and the Datalogic logo are registered trademarks of Datalogic S.p.A. in many
countries, including the U.S.A. and the E.U. All other brand and product names may be
trademarks of their respective owners.
Patents
See www.patents.datalogic.com for patent list.
Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................................................ 9
About this Manual .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
Manual Conventions ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................10
References ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Technical Support ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 10
Datalogic Website Support ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................10
Reseller Technical Support ................................................................................................................................................................................................................10
Telephone Technical Support ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................10
About the Reader ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
The BC40xx™ Radio Base ............................................................................................................................................................................. 11
Base LEDs .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................11
Base Button .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................12
BC40XX UV Counterfeit Detection .............................................................................................................................................................. 12
Display ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
Battery Safety ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
Programming the Reader ............................................................................................................................................................................ 16
Configuration Methods ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................16
SETUP .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 17
Unpacking ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17
Setting Up the Reader .................................................................................................................................................................................. 17
Installing the Interface Cable ...................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Configuring the Base Station ...................................................................................................................................................................... 20
Changing the Base Station Position ..............................................................................................................................................................................................21
Connecting the Base Station ............................................................................................................................................................................................................22
Connecting the Base when Security Pin is Enabled .................................................................................................................................................................25
Linking the Reader to a Base Station .............................................................................................................................................................................................25
Linking a BT Reader to a PC ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................26
GRYPHON™ I System and Network Layouts ............................................................................................................................................... 27
Stand Alone Layouts ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................27
Interface Selection ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
Setting the Interface ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................29
Customizing Configuration Settings .......................................................................................................................................................... 33
Configure Interface Settings ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................33
Global Interface Features ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................33
Configuring Other Features ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................33
Software Version Transmission .......................................................................................................................................................................................................33
Resetting the Product Configuration to Defaults .....................................................................................................................................................................34
Replacing the Battery ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................35
CONFIGURATION USING BARCODES ............................................................................................................................................ 37
Configuration Parameters .................................................................................................................................................................................................................37
Reading Configuration Barcodes ....................................................................................................................................................................................................38
GLOBAL INTERFACE FEATURES 39
Host Commands — Obey/Ignore .............................................................................................................................................................................39
USB Suspend Mode ........................................................................................................................................................................................................39
RS-232 ONLY Interface ........................................................................................................................................................... 41
Baud Rate ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................42
Data Bits .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................43
Stop Bits ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................43
Parity ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................44
Handshaking Control ....................................................................................................................................................................................................45
RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces................................................................................................................................................... 46
Intercharacter Delay .......................................................................................................................................................................................................47
Beep On ASCII BEL ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................47
Product Reference Guide
1
Contents
Beep On Not on File .......................................................................................................................................................................................................48
ACK NAK Options ............................................................................................................................................................................................................49
ACK Character ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................50
NAK Character ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................50
ACK NAK Timeout Value ...............................................................................................................................................................................................51
ACK NAK Retry Count ....................................................................................................................................................................................................51
ACK NAK Error Handling ...............................................................................................................................................................................................52
Indicate Transmission Failure .....................................................................................................................................................................................52
Disable Character ............................................................................................................................................................................................................53
Enable Character .............................................................................................................................................................................................................53
Keyboard Interface................................................................................................................................................................. 55
Country Mode ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................56
Caps Lock State ................................................................................................................................................................................................................59
Numlock .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................60
Send Control Characters ..............................................................................................................................................................................................61
Wedge Quiet Interval ....................................................................................................................................................................................................62
Intercharacter Delay .......................................................................................................................................................................................................63
Intercode Delay ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................64
USB Keyboard Speed .....................................................................................................................................................................................................65
USB Keyboard Numeric Keypad ................................................................................................................................................................................66
USB-OEM Interface ................................................................................................................................................................. 67
USB-OEM Device Usage ................................................................................................................................................................................................68
Interface Options ............................................................................................................................................................................................................68
IBM 46XX Interface ................................................................................................................................................................. 69
46xx Number of Host Resets .......................................................................................................................................................................................70
Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format ..........................................................................................................................................................................72
Interface Options ............................................................................................................................................................................................................72
Wand Emulation Interface ..................................................................................................................................................... 73
Wand Signal Speed ........................................................................................................................................................................................................74
Wand Polarity ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................74
Wand Idle State ................................................................................................................................................................................................................75
Transmit Noise .................................................................................................................................................................................................................75
Label Symbology Conversion .....................................................................................................................................................................................76
Data Format ............................................................................................................................................................................ 77
Global Prefix/Suffix .........................................................................................................................................................................................................78
Global AIM ID ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................79
GS1-128 AIM ID ................................................................................................................................................................................................................80
Label ID ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................81
Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets .............................................................................................................................................................................................81
Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology ...............................................................................................................................................................81
Label ID Control ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................82
Label ID Symbology Selection ...................................................................................................................................................................................83
Set Global Mid Label ID Characters ..........................................................................................................................................................................89
Case Conversion ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................90
Character Conversion ....................................................................................................................................................................................................90
Reading Parameters .............................................................................................................................................................. 91
Double Read Timeout ...................................................................................................................................................................................................92
Label Gone Timeout ......................................................................................................................................................................................................93
Sleep Mode Timeout .....................................................................................................................................................................................................94
LED AND BEEPER INDICATORS ................................................................................................................................................... 96
Power On Alert .................................................................................................................................................................................................................96
Good Read: When to Indicate .....................................................................................................................................................................................96
Good Read Beep Type ...................................................................................................................................................................................................97
Good Read Beep Frequency .......................................................................................................................................................................................97
Good Read Beep Length ..............................................................................................................................................................................................98
Good Read Beep Volume .............................................................................................................................................................................................99
Good Read LED Duration .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 100
SCANNING FEATURES ...............................................................................................................................................................101
Scan Mode ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 101
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout ............................................................................................................................................................................. 102
Stand Detection ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 103
2
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT 4100/L GD4300
Contents
Stand Mode Sensitivity .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 104
Scanning Active Time ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 104
Flash On Time ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 105
Flash Off Time ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 105
Green Spot Duration ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 106
Code Selection ...................................................................................................................................................................... 107
DISABLE ALL SYMBOLOGIES ....................................................................................................................................................108
CODE EAN/UPC ..........................................................................................................................................................................109
Coupon Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 109
UPC-A ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 110
UPC-A Enable/Disable ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 110
UPC-A Check Character Transmission .................................................................................................................................................................. 110
Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 111
UPC-A Number System Character Transmission .............................................................................................................................................. 111
UPC-A Minimum Reads .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 112
UPC-E ..........................................................................................................................................................................................113
UPC-E Enable/Disable ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 113
UPC-E Check Character Transmission ................................................................................................................................................................... 113
Expand UPC-E to EAN-13 .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 114
Expand UPC-E to UPC-A ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 114
UPC-E Number System Character Transmission ............................................................................................................................................... 115
UPC-E Minimum Reads .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 115
GTIN FORMATTING ....................................................................................................................................................................116
EAN 13 (JAN 13) .........................................................................................................................................................................117
EAN 13 Enable/Disable .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 117
EAN 13 Check Character Transmission ................................................................................................................................................................ 117
EAN-13 Flag 1 Character ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 118
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 118
EAN 13 Minimum Reads ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 119
ISSN ............................................................................................................................................................................................120
ISSN Enable/Disable .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 120
EAN 8 (JAN 8) .............................................................................................................................................................................121
EAN 8 Enable/Disable ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 121
EAN 8 Check Character Transmission ................................................................................................................................................................... 121
Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13 ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 122
EAN 8 Minimum Reads ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 122
UPC/EAN GLOBAL SETTINGS ....................................................................................................................................................123
UPC/EAN Decoding Level ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 123
UPC/EAN Correlation .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 124
UPC/EAN Price Weight Check .................................................................................................................................................................................. 124
In-Store Minimum Reads ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 125
ADD-ONS ....................................................................................................................................................................................126
Optional Add-ons ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 126
Optional Add-On Timer ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 127
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer ........................................................................................................................................................................... 130
P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads ................................................................................................................................................................................... 133
P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads ................................................................................................................................................................................... 134
GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads ....................................................................................................................................................................... 135
CODE 39 ......................................................................................................................................................................................136
Code 39 Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 136
Code 39 Check Character Calculation .................................................................................................................................................................. 136
Code 39 Check Character Transmission .............................................................................................................................................................. 137
Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission ...................................................................................................................................................... 138
Code 39 Full ASCII ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 138
Code 39 Quiet Zones .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 139
Code 39 Minimum Reads .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 140
Code 39 Decoding Level ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 141
Code 39 Length Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 142
Code 39 Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 143
Code 39 Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 144
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 145
Code 39 Character Correlation ................................................................................................................................................................................ 147
Product Reference Guide
3
Contents
Code 39 Stitching ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 147
CODE 32 (ITAL PHARMACEUTICAL CODE) ...............................................................................................................................148
Code 32 Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 148
Code 32 Feature Setting Exceptions ..................................................................................................................................................................... 148
Code 32 Check Char Transmission ........................................................................................................................................................................ 149
Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission ...................................................................................................................................................... 149
CODE 39 CIP (FRENCH PHARMACEUTICAL) .............................................................................................................................150
Code 39 CIP Enable/Disable ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 150
CODE 128 ...................................................................................................................................................................................151
Code 128 Enable/Disable .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 151
Expand Code 128 to Code 39 .................................................................................................................................................................................. 151
Code 128 Check Character Transmission ............................................................................................................................................................ 152
Code 128 Function Character Transmission ...................................................................................................................................................... 152
Code 128 Sub-Code Change Transmission ........................................................................................................................................................ 153
Code 128 Quiet Zones ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 154
Code 128 Minimum Reads ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 155
Code 128 Decoding Level ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 156
Code 128 Length Control .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 157
Code 128 Set Length 1 ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 158
Code 128 Set Length 2 ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 159
Code 128 Character Correlation ............................................................................................................................................................................. 160
Code 128 Stitching ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 160
GS1-128 ......................................................................................................................................................................................161
GS1-128 Enable ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 161
CODE ISBT 128 ...........................................................................................................................................................................162
ISBT 128 Concatenation ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 162
ISBT 128 Force Concatenation ................................................................................................................................................................................ 162
ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode ................................................................................................................................................................................ 163
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout ........................................................................................................................................................ 164
ISBT 128 Advanced Concatenation Options ...................................................................................................................................................... 164
CODABLOCK F ............................................................................................................................................................................165
Codablock F Enable/Disable .................................................................................................................................................................................... 165
Codablock F EAN Enable/Disable ........................................................................................................................................................................... 165
Codablock F AIM Check ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 166
Codablock F Length Control .................................................................................................................................................................................... 166
Codablock F Set Length 1 ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 167
Codablock F Set Length 2 ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 168
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 (I 2 OF 5) .................................................................................................................................................169
I 2 of 5 Enable/Disable ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 169
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation ..................................................................................................................................................................... 169
I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission .................................................................................................................................................................. 170
I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 171
2 of 5 Decoding Level ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 172
I 2 of 5 Length Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 173
I 2 of 5 Set Length 1 ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 174
I 2 of 5 Set Length 2 ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 175
I 2 of 5 Character Correlation ................................................................................................................................................................................... 176
I 2 of 5 Stitching ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 176
FOLLETT 2 OF 5 ..........................................................................................................................................................................177
Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable .................................................................................................................................................................................... 177
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 CIP HR .....................................................................................................................................................177
Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................ 177
STANDARD 2 OF 5 .....................................................................................................................................................................178
Standard 2 of 5 Enable/Disable .............................................................................................................................................................................. 178
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation .................................................................................................................................................... 178
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ................................................................................................................................................. 179
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads ............................................................................................................................................................................ 179
Standard 2 of 5 Decoding Level ............................................................................................................................................................................. 180
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control .............................................................................................................................................................................. 180
Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................... 181
Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................... 182
Standard 2 of 5 Character Correlation .................................................................................................................................................................. 183
4
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT 4100/L GD4300
Contents
Standard 2 of 5 Stitching ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 183
INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 ....................................................................................................................................................................184
Industrial 2 of 5 Enable/Disable .............................................................................................................................................................................. 184
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation .................................................................................................................................................... 184
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ................................................................................................................................................ 185
Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control .............................................................................................................................................................................. 185
Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................... 186
Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................... 187
Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads ............................................................................................................................................................................ 188
Industrial 2 of 5 Stitching .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 188
Industrial 2 of 5 Character Correlation ................................................................................................................................................................. 189
CODE IATA ..................................................................................................................................................................................190
IATA Enable/Disable ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 190
IATA Check Character Transmission ..................................................................................................................................................................... 190
DATALOGIC 2 OF 5 ....................................................................................................................................................................191
Datalogic 2 of 5 Enable/Disable .............................................................................................................................................................................. 191
Datalogic 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation ................................................................................................................................................... 191
Datalogic 2 of 5 Minimum Reads ........................................................................................................................................................................... 192
Datalogic 2 of 5 Decoding Level ............................................................................................................................................................................. 192
Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control ............................................................................................................................................................................. 193
Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................... 194
Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................... 195
Datalogic 2 of 5 Character Correlation ................................................................................................................................................................. 196
Datalogic 2 of 5 Stitching .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 196
CODABAR ...................................................................................................................................................................................197
Codabar Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 197
Codabar Check Character Calculation .................................................................................................................................................................. 197
Codabar Check Character Transmission .............................................................................................................................................................. 198
Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission ...................................................................................................................................................... 198
Codabar Start/Stop Character Set .......................................................................................................................................................................... 199
Codabar Start/Stop Character Match ................................................................................................................................................................... 199
Codabar Quiet Zones .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 200
Codabar Minimum Reads ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 201
Codabar Decoding Level ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 202
Codabar Length Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 203
Codabar Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 204
Codabar Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 205
Codabar Interdigit Ratio ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 206
Codabar Character Correlation ............................................................................................................................................................................... 208
Codabar Stitching ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 208
ABC CODABAR ...........................................................................................................................................................................209
ABC Codabar Enable/Disable .................................................................................................................................................................................. 209
ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode ...................................................................................................................................................................... 209
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout .............................................................................................................................................. 210
ABC Codabar Force Concatenation ....................................................................................................................................................................... 211
CODE 11 ......................................................................................................................................................................................212
Code 11 Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 212
Code 11 Check Character Calculation .................................................................................................................................................................. 212
Code 11 Check Character Transmission .............................................................................................................................................................. 213
Code 11 Minimum Reads .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 213
Code 11 Length Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 214
Code 11 Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 215
Code 11 Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 216
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 217
Code 11 Decoding Level ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 219
Code 11 Character Correlation ................................................................................................................................................................................ 220
Code 11 Stitching ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 220
GS1 DATABAR™ OMNIDIRECTIONAL .......................................................................................................................................221
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................... 221
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation ....................................................................................................................................... 221
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Minimum Reads ............................................................................................................................................. 222
GS1 DATABAR™ EXPANDED .....................................................................................................................................................223
Product Reference Guide
5
Contents
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................ 223
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation ................................................................................................................................................... 223
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Minimum Reads ......................................................................................................................................................... 224
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control ........................................................................................................................................................... 224
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................. 225
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................. 226
GS1 DATABAR™ LIMITED ..........................................................................................................................................................227
GS1 DataBar™ Limited Enable/Disable ................................................................................................................................................................. 227
GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation ........................................................................................................................................................ 227
GS1 DataBar™ Limited Minimum Reads .............................................................................................................................................................. 228
CODE 93 ......................................................................................................................................................................................229
Code 93 Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 229
Code 93 Check Character Calculation .................................................................................................................................................................. 229
Code 93 Check Character Transmission .............................................................................................................................................................. 230
Code 93 Length Control ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 230
Code 93 Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 231
Code 93 Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 232
Code 93 Minimum Reads .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 233
Code 93 Decoding Level ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 234
Code 93 Quiet Zones .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 235
Code 93 Stitching ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 236
Code 93 Character Correlation ................................................................................................................................................................................ 236
MSI ..............................................................................................................................................................................................237
MSI Enable/Disable ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 237
MSI Check Character Calculation ........................................................................................................................................................................... 237
MSI Check Character Transmission ........................................................................................................................................................................ 238
MSI Length Control ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 238
MSI Set Length 1 .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 239
MSI Set Length 2 .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 240
MSI Minimum Reads ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 241
MSI Decoding Level .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 242
PLESSEY ......................................................................................................................................................................................243
Plessey Enable/Disable .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 243
Plessey Check Character Calculation .................................................................................................................................................................... 244
Plessey Check Character Transmission ................................................................................................................................................................ 244
Plessey Length Control .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 245
Plessey Set Length 1 ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 246
Plessey Set Length 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 247
Plessey Minimum Reads ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 248
Plessey Decoding Level ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 249
Plessey Stitching .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 250
Plessey Character Correlation ................................................................................................................................................................................. 250
CODE 4 ........................................................................................................................................................................................251
Code 4 Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 251
Code 4 Check Character Transmission ................................................................................................................................................................. 251
Code 4 Hex to Decimal Conversion ....................................................................................................................................................................... 252
CODE 5 ........................................................................................................................................................................................252
Code 5 Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 252
Code 5 Check Character Transmission ................................................................................................................................................................. 253
Code 5 Hex to Decimal Conversion ....................................................................................................................................................................... 253
CODE 4 AND CODE 5 COMMON CONFIGURATION ITEMS ......................................................................................................254
Code 4 and 5 Decoding Level .................................................................................................................................................................................. 254
Code 4 and Code 5 Minimum Reads ..................................................................................................................................................................... 255
WIRELESS FEATURES................................................................................................................................................................... 257
WIRELESS BEEPER FEATURES ...................................................................................................................................................259
Good Transmission Beep .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 259
Beep Frequency ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 259
Beep Duration ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 260
Beep Volume ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 261
Disconnect Beep .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 261
Base Station Beep ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 262
6
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT 4100/L GD4300
Contents
Leash Alarm .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 262
CONFIGURATION UPDATES ......................................................................................................................................................264
Automatic Configuration Update .......................................................................................................................................................................... 264
Copy Configuration to Scanner .............................................................................................................................................................................. 264
Copy Configuration to Base Station ...................................................................................................................................................................... 265
Automatic Flash Update ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 265
Request Flash Update ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 266
Powerdown Timeout .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 266
BATCH FEATURES ......................................................................................................................................................................268
Batch Mode .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 268
Send Batch ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 268
Erase Batch Memory ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 269
RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay ............................................................................................................................................................................... 269
DIRECT RADIO AUTOLINK .........................................................................................................................................................270
RF ADDRESS STAMPING ............................................................................................................................................................270
Source Radio Address Transmission ..................................................................................................................................................................... 270
Source Radio Address Delimiter Character ........................................................................................................................................................ 271
Features for Star Models Only ............................................................................................................................................. 272
STAR Radio Protocol Timeout ................................................................................................................................................................................. 272
STAR Radio Transmit Mode ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 273
DISPLAY FEATURES ...................................................................................................................................................................274
Contrast ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 274
Font Size .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 274
Backlight .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 275
Display Mode ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 275
Display Timeout ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 276
Keypad Select ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 278
Bluetooth-Only Features...................................................................................................................................................... 279
BT SECURITY FEATURES ............................................................................................................................................................280
BT Security Mode ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 280
BT Pin Code .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 281
Select PIN Code Length ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 281
Set PIN Code .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 281
BT HID FEATURES ......................................................................................................................................................................282
BT HID Variable PIN Code .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 282
BT HID ALT Mode ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 282
BT HID Send Unkown ASCII Char ............................................................................................................................................................................ 283
OTHER BT FEATURES .................................................................................................................................................................284
BT Poll Rate ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 284
LASER FEATURES ......................................................................................................................................................................... 287
Laser Scan Angle .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 288
Laser Idle Mode ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 288
Bi-Directional Read Decoding ................................................................................................................................................................................. 289
Always On Scan Mode Timeout .............................................................................................................................................................................. 290
REFERENCES................................................................................................................................................................................. 291
RS-232 Parameters .....................................................................................................................................................................................291
RS-232 Only ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 291
RS-232/USB COM Parameters ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 292
Keyboard Interface .....................................................................................................................................................................................299
Wedge Quiet Interval ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 299
Intercharacter Delay ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 300
Intercode Delay .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 301
Symbologies ...............................................................................................................................................................................................302
Decoding Level .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 302
Set Length ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 302
Data Editing ................................................................................................................................................................................................304
Global Prefix/Suffix ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 305
Global AIM ID ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 306
Label ID ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 307
Character Conversion ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 311
Reading Parameters ...................................................................................................................................................................................312
Product Reference Guide
7
Contents
Label Gone Timeout ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 312
Good Read LED Duration ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 313
Scanning Features ......................................................................................................................................................................................314
Scan Mode ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 314
Scanning Active Time ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 315
Flash On Time ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 316
Flash Off Time ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 317
Display Settings ..........................................................................................................................................................................................318
Display Mode ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 318
RF Features .................................................................................................................................................................................................318
Configuration Update ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 318
RF Address Stamping ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 318
BT-Only Features ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 321
MESSAGE FORMATTING.............................................................................................................................................................. 323
Message Formatting ..................................................................................................................................................................................323
Cursor Control .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 324
Font Selection ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 324
Clearing Display ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 325
LED and Beeper Control .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 325
Messages from Scanner Command Keys ..................................................................................................................................................326
Technical Specifications ............................................................................................................................................................. 327
Standard Cable Pinouts .............................................................................................................................................................................330
LED and Beeper Indications .......................................................................................................................................................................331
Error Codes ..................................................................................................................................................................................................332
Base Station Indications (Cordless Models ONLY) ...................................................................................................................................333
Base Station Button Indicators ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 333
Standard Defaults ....................................................................................................................................................................... 335
Sample Bar Codes........................................................................................................................................................................ 347
Keypad ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 351
Scancode Tables .......................................................................................................................................................................... 355
Control Character Emulation .....................................................................................................................................................................355
Single Press and Release Keys ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 355
Interface Type PC AT PS/2, USB-Keyboard or USB-Keyboard for APPLE ...............................................................................................356
Interface type PC AT PS/2 Alt Mode or USB-Keyboard Alt Mode ...........................................................................................................358
Digital Interface ..........................................................................................................................................................................................360
IBM31xx 102-key ........................................................................................................................................................................................361
IBM XT ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................362
Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252 .........................................................................................................................................................363
Index ......................................................................................................................................................................... 365
8
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT 4100/L GD4300
Chapter 1
Introduction
About this Manual
This Product Reference Guide (PRG) is provided for users seeking advanced technical
information, including connection, programming, maintenance and specifications. The Quick
Reference Guide (QRG) and other publications associated with this product are downloadable
free of charge from the website listed on the back cover of this manual.
Overview
Chapter 1, (this chapter) presents information about manual conventions, and an overview of
the reader, its features and operation.
Chapter 2, Setup presents information about unpacking, cable connection information and
setting up the reader.
Chapter 3, Configuration Using Barcodes provides instructions and barcode labels for
customizing your reader. There are different sections for interface types, general features, data
formatting, symbology-specific and model-specific features.
Chapter 4, Wireless Features describes options and programming related to radio
communication features for the RF variants of the Gryphon family.
Chapter 5, Laser Features describes options and programming specific to laser models.
Chapter 6, References provides background information and detailed instructions for more
complex programming items.
Chapter 7, Message Formatting provides details for programming options.
Appendix A, Technical Specifications lists physical and performance characteristics, as well as
environmental and regulatory specifications. It also provides standard cable pin-outs and LED/
Beeper functions.
Appendix B, Standard Defaults references common factory default settings for reader features
and options.
Appendix C, Sample Bar Codes offers sample barcodes of several common symbologies.
Appendix D, Keypad includes numeric barcodes to be scanned for certain parameter settings.
Appendix E, Scancode Tables lists control character emulation information for Wedge and USB
Keyboard interfaces.
Product Reference Guide
9
Introduction
Manual Conventions
The following conventions are used in this document:
The symbols listed below are used in this manual to notify the reader of key issues or procedures
that must be observed when using the reader:
Notes contain information necessary for properly diagnosing,
repairing and operating the reader.
The CAUTION symbol advises you of actions that could damage
equipment or property.
CAUTION
References
Current versions of this Product Reference Guide (PRG), Quick Reference Guide (QRG), the
Datalogic Aladdin™ Configuration application, and any other manuals, instruction sheets and
utilities for this product can be downloaded from the website listed below. Alternatively, printed
copies or product support CDs for most products can be purchased through your Datalogic
reseller.
Technical Support
Datalogic Website Support
The Datalogic website (www.datalogic.com) is the complete source for technical support and
information for Datalogic products. The site offers product support, warranty information,
product manuals, product tech notes, software updates, demos, and instructions for returning
products for repair.
Reseller Technical Support
An excellent source for technical assistance and information is an authorized Datalogic reseller.
A reseller is acquainted with specific types of businesses, application software, and computer
systems and can provide individualized assistance.
Telephone Technical Support
If you do not have internet or email access, you may contact Datalogic technical support at
(541) 349-8283 or check the back cover of your manual for more contact information.
10
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
About the Reader
About the Reader
Typically, units are factory-programmed for the most common terminal and communications
settings. If you need to modify any programmable settings, custom configuration can be
accomplished by scanning the programming barcodes within this guide.
Several models of the Gryphon are available, and are covered in this manual:
• Gryphon I GD4100 - Corded linear imager barcode reader
• Gryphon I GM4100 - Cordless linear imager barcode reader with Datalogic STAR™.
• Gryphon L GD4300 - Model with Laser scan engine.
• Gryphon I BT 4100 - Model with Bluetooth options.
Programming can alternatively be performed using the Datalogic Aladdin™ Configuration
application which is downloadable from the Datalogic website listed on the back cover of this
manual. This multi-platform utility program allows device configuration using a PC. It
communicates to the device using a serial or USB cable and can also create configuration
barcodes to print.
Advancements in the LED technology used in the imager-based readers significantly improve
the illumination of the target field of view, resulting in higher scan efficiency. Whether used in
Single Trigger or Continuous Mode, the ergonomic design of the reader will help to promote
comfortable handling during extended periods of use.
See "Interface Selection"on page 29 for a listing and descriptions of available interface sets by
model type.
The BC40xx™ Radio Base
Base LEDs
LEDs on the Gryphon I Base provide information about the Base’s status, as shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1. Gryphon I Base LEDs
YELLOW LED
BUTTON
RED LED /
GREEN LED
Product Reference Guide
11
Introduction
The following table describes the significance of each LED:
LED
STATUS
Yellow On = Base is powered
Power on / Data
Yellow Blinking = Base receives data and
commands from the Host or the Reader.
Charging
Red On = Battery charging is in progress.
Charge completed
Green On = the Battery is completely charged.
Charging + Charge completed
Red and Green Blinking together = the Reader is not
correctly placed onto the Base.
See Base Station Indications (Cordless Models ONLY) on page 333 for more specific details on
the LEDs.
Base Button
The Base contains a button which is used primarily to perform a paging function. Pressing the
button causes a sound signal to be emitted by all scanners linked with this Base, as long as the
scanner is awake (see Powerdown Timeout on page 266) and reception is enabled (see Sleep
Mode Timeout on page 94). The button can also be used to "force device connection" via the
Datalogic Aladdin Software tool (available for free download from the Datalogic website). See
the Aladdin Online Help for details.
See Base Station Indications (Cordless Models ONLY) on page 333 for further information on
Base Button functions.
BC40XX UV Counterfeit Detection
The BC40XX Radio Base is available with a UV Counterfeit Money Detector, typically used to
verify the authenticity of bank notes. Other uses for counterfeit detection are passport, ticket,
credit card, travelers’ check and similar applications where it is possible to detect fluorescent
marks with UV light.
The detector contains eight special UV LEDs, as shown below:
UV LEDs
12
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
BC40XX UV Counterfeit Detection
The Counterfeit Detector is based on UV fluorescent emission. Real banknotes under
ultraviolet rays usually absorb the UV light and will show special marks made with fluorescent
inks. On the other hand, most counterfeit banknotes only reflect the UV lights, without
showing fluorescent marks.
To use:
1. Quickly press the Base button to light the UV LEDs.
2. Hold the item to be verified under the LED lights to ensure that the special fluorescent
marks are visible.
3. The LEDs are set to switch off automatically after about 2 minutes. To keep the UV LEDs
in always-on mode, quickly press the Base button a second time within 10 seconds of the
first press. To switch them off, simply press the button again.
An external power supply is necessary for full functionality of the Base station with UV
Counterfeit Detector. Use only the recommended AC adapter 12Vdc.
Product Reference Guide
13
Introduction
Display
The Gryphon GM4100 is available with an optional Display. The Display features 4 lines and
16 characters, and offers icons and three additional keys to allow a better interaction with a
remote host.
Fonts, contrast, backlight and other parameters can be configured for the Display. See Display
Features on page 274 and Message Formatting on page 323 for more information.
Figure 2. Gryphon™ I Display
Battery Safety
To reinstall, charge and/or perform any other action on the battery, follow the instructions in
this manual.
Before installing the Battery, read “Battery Safety” on this and the following pages. Datalogic recommends annual replacement of rechargeable battery packs to ensure maximum performance.
WARNING
14
Do not discharge the battery using any device except for the scanner. When the battery is used in
devices other than the designated product, it may damage the battery or reduce its life expectancy. If the device causes an abnormal current to flow, it may cause the battery to become hot,
explode or ignite and cause serious injury.
Lithium-ion battery packs may get hot, explode or ignite and cause serious injury if exposed to
abusive conditions. Be sure to follow the safety warnings listed below:
•
Do not place the battery pack in fire or heat.
•
Do not connect the positive terminal and negative terminal of the battery pack to each other
with any metal object (such as wire).
•
Do not carry or store the battery pack together with metal objects.
•
Do not pierce the battery pack with nails, strike it with a hammer, step on it or otherwise subject it to strong impacts or shocks.
•
Do not solder directly onto the battery pack.
•
Do not expose the battery pack to liquids, or allow the battery to get wet.
•
Do not apply voltages to the battery pack contacts.
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Battery Safety
WARNING
In the event the battery pack leaks and the fluid gets into your eye, do not rub the eye. Rinse well
with water and immediately seek medical care. If left untreated, the battery fluid could cause
damage to the eye.
•
•
CAUTION
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Always charge the battery at 32° – 104°F (0° - 40°C) temperature range.
Use only the authorized power supplies, battery pack, chargers, and docks supplied by your Datalogic reseller. The use of any other power supplies can damage the device and void your warranty.
Do not disassemble or modify the battery. The battery contains safety and protection devices,
which, if damaged, may cause the battery to generate heat, explode or ignite.
Do not place the battery in or near fire, on stoves or other high temperature locations.
Do not place the battery in direct sunlight, or use or store the battery inside cars in hot weather.
Doing so may cause the battery to generate heat, explode or ignite. Using the battery in this manner may also result in a loss of performance and a shortened life expectancy.
Do not place the battery in microwave ovens, high-pressure containers or on induction cookware.
Immediately discontinue use of the battery if, while using, charging or storing the battery, the battery emits an unusual smell, feels hot, changes color or shape, or appears abnormal in any other
way.
Do not replace the battery pack when the device is turned on.
Do not remove or damage the battery pack’s label.
Do not use the battery pack if it is damaged in any part.
Battery pack usage by children should be supervised.
As with other types of batteries, Lithium-Ion (LI) batteries will lose capacity over time. Capacity
deterioration is noticeable after one year of service whether the battery is in use or not. It is
difficult to precisely predict the finite life of a LI battery, but cell manufacturers rate them at
500 charge cycles. In other words, the batteries should be expected to take 500 full discharge /
charge cycles before needing replacement. This number is higher if partial discharging /
recharging is adhered to rather than full / deep discharging, .
Storage of batteries for long time at fully charged status or at fully discharged status should be
avoided.
Only in case of long storage, to avoid deep discharge of the battery it is recommended to partially
recharge the battery every three months to keep the charge status at a medium level.
As a reference, run a fast recharge for 20 minutes every three months on unused products to avoid
any performance deterioration of the cell.
The useful life of LI batteries depends on usage and number of charges, etc., after which they
should be removed from service, especially in mission critical applications. Do not continue to
use a battery showing excessive loss of capacity, it should be properly recycled / disposed of and
replaced.
Collect and recycle waste batteries separately from the device in compliance with European
Directive 2006/66/EC, 2011/65/EU, 2002/96/EC and 2012/19/EU and subsequent
modifications, US and China regulatory and others laws and regulations about the
environment.
Product Reference Guide
15
Introduction
Programming the Reader
Configuration Methods
Programming Barcodes
The reader is factory-configured with a standard set of default features. After scanning the
interface barcode, you can select other options and customize your reader through use of the
instructions and programming barcode labels available in the corresponding features section for
your interface. Customizable settings for many features are found in "Configuration Using
Barcodes" starting on page 37.
Some programming labels, like "Restore Custom Defaults"on page 34, require only the scan of
the single label to enact the change. Most, however, require the reader to be placed in
Programming Mode prior to scanning them. Scan an ENTER/EXIT barcode once to enter
Programming Mode. Once the reader is in Programming Mode, scan a number of parameter
settings before scanning the ENTER/EXIT barcode a second time, which will then accept your
changes, exit Programming Mode and return the reader to normal operation.
There are some exceptions to the typical programming sequence described
above. Please read the description and setting instructions carefully when
configuring each programmable feature.
Datalogic Aladdin™
Datalogic Aladdin™ is a multi-platform utility program providing a quick and user-friendly
configuration method via the RS-232/USB-COM interface. Aladdin is available on the CDROM provided with your product, and also from the Datalogic website. Aladdin allows you to
program the reader by selecting configuration commands through a user-friendly graphical
interface running on a PC. These commands are sent to the reader over the selected
communication interface, or they can be printed as barcodes to be scanned.
Aladdin also provides the ability to perform a software upgrade for the connected device (see the
Datalogic Aladdin™ Help On-Line for more details).
16
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Chapter 2
Setup
Unpacking
Check carefully to ensure the reader and any accessories ordered are present and undamaged. If
any damage occurred during shipment, contact Datalogic Technical Support. Information is
shown on page 10.
KEEP THE PACKAGING. Should the unit ever require service, it should be returned in its
original shipping container.
Setting Up the Reader
Depending on whether you are using a Corded or Mobile version of the Gryphon, follow the
steps provided in this section to connect and get your reader up and communicating with its
host.
1. Begin by Installing the Interface Cable (Corded) or Connecting the Base Station (Mobile)
2. Go to Interface Selection and set the desired interface.
3. Configure Interface Settings (only if not using factory settings for that interface)
4. Go to Configuring Other Features (if modifications are needed from factory settings)
Product Reference Guide
17
Setup
Installing the Interface Cable
For Corded versions, connect the reader cable by inserting the cable into the handle as shown in
Figure 3. To remove it, insert a paper clip into the release aperture, then unplug the cable.
Figure 3. Connect/disconnect the cable
RS-232 Serial Connection
Turn off power to the terminal/PC and connect the reader to the terminal/PC serial port via the
RS-232 cable as shown in Figure 4. If the terminal will not support POT (Power Off the
Terminal) to supply reader power, use the approved power supply (AC Adapter). Plug the AC
Adapter barrel connector into the socket on the RS-232 cable connector and the AC Adapter
plug into a standard power outlet.
Figure 4. RS-232 Connection
18
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT 4100/L GD4300
Installing the Interface Cable
Keyboard Wedge Connection
The Keyboard Wedge cable has a ‘Y’ connection from the reader. Connect the female to the
male end from the keyboard and the remaining end at the keyboard port at the terminal/PC.
Reference Figure 5.
Figure 5. Keyboard Wedge Interface connection
USB Connection
Connect the reader to a USB port on the terminal/PC using the correct USB cable for the
interface type you ordered. Reference Figure 6.
Figure 6. USB connection
Other connection types are described below and illustrated in Figure 7.
Product Reference Guide
19
Setup
Figure 7. Other Interface Connections
B
US
W yboa
ed rd
ge
Ke
or...
IB M
or...
Specific cables are required for connection to different hosts. The connectors illustrated above are examples only. Actual connectors may vary from
those illustrated, but the steps to connect the reader remain the same.
RF Models
The power supply connects directly to the base (not on the cable's jack) for all configurations.
For all interfaces (except RS-232) a power supply is recommended but not necessary, because
the base can be powered from the Host. When the base is powered from the Host, select a slow
charge rate.
Configuring the Base Station
The base charger/station may be configured in desk application to hold the reader in two
different positions, either a horizontal or standing position, in order to provide the most
comfortable use depending on needs.
Standing
20
Horizontal
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT 4100/L GD4300
Configuring the Base Station
Changing the Base Station Position
The base station is configured by installing one of two sets of mechanical parts that come with
the cordless kit. The default mounts (shown below) provide three options: vertical (wall)
mounting, standing (45°), or horizontal mounting with a higher mechanical retention of the
scanner. Use the other mounts only for horizontal mounting, with lower retention of the
scanner. The different parts may be interchanged to customize retention preferences.
A tool such as a rigid pen or a flat screwdriver can be used to change the
mounts. Do not allow it to touch the contacts.
1. Insert the appropriate parts for the desired base station position, as shown below.
Standing,
Horizontal
or Vertical
Horizontal
Only
To ensure best contact and performance, do not intermix the
parts of the two different mount sets.
CAUTION
2. Using your thumbs, push open the plastic tabs on the bottom of the base to free the wing
holders.
Tab
Tab
Product Reference Guide
21
Setup
3. The stand can now be repositioned in either horizontal or standing position.
Horizontal
Standing
Connecting the Base Station
Figure 8 shows how to connect the Base Station to a terminal, PC or other host device. Turn off
the host before connection and consult the manual for that equipment (if necessary) before
proceeding. Connect the interface cable before applying power to the Base Station.
The Gryphon GBT4100 can be set up to require a PIN code when connecting to the
host. To connect to a system that uses a custom security PIN, follow the procedure in
"Connecting the Base when Security Pin is Enabled" on page 25. For information on how to configure this feature, see BT Security Mode, starting on page
280.
Base Station Connection and Routing: Fully insert the Power Cable and Interface (I/F) Cable
connectors into their respective ports in the underside of the Base Station (see Figure 8). Then
connect to an AC Adapter, and plug the AC power cord into the (wall) outlet.
Gryphon Mobile can also be Powered by the Terminal. The external power supply is
recommended but not necessary. When powered by the Terminal, the battery charger is automatically set as Slow charge.
For some specific interfaces or hosts or lengths of cable, the use of an external
power supply may be recommended for full recharging capability (see "Technical
Specifications, starting on page 327" for more details).
22
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT 4100/L GD4300
Configuring the Base Station
Figure 8. Connecting the Base Station
Wall plug
Connector
I/F Cable
AC/DC
Adapter
DC Power
Cord
Base
Station
Securing the DC Power Cord (Optional)
The DC power cord for the adapter can be secured to the bottom of the base in order to
maximize the mechanical retention of the cable itself. The routing of the power cord can be
changed to accommodate the base station positioning: horizontal, stand or wall mounting. The
cables can be looped around to the front of the Base Station, or fed directly out the back of the
Base Station, as shown in Figure 9.
Figure 9. Options for routing the DC cord
Please refer to the arrows depicted on the bottom of the base when placing the cables, detailed in
Figure 10.
Product Reference Guide
23
Setup
Figure 10. Arrows showing routing
Host Connection: Verify before connection that the reader’s cable type is compatible with your
host equipment. Most connections plug directly into the host device as shown below. Keyboard
Wedge interface cables have a ‘Y’ connection where its female end mates with the male end of
the cable from the keyboard and the remaining end at the keyboard port on the terminal/PC.
B
Figure 11. Connecting to the Host
Wa
Ke W
or...
nd
US
yb
ed oard
ge
or...
M
or...
IB
Power Connection : Plug the AC Adapter in to an approved AC wall socket with the cable
facing downwards (as shown in Figure 8) to prevent undue strain on the socket.
Gryphon Mobile can also be Powered by the Terminal. The external power supply is recommended but not necessary. When powered by the Terminal, the battery charger is
automatically set as Slow charge.
Disconnecting the Cable: To detach the cable, insert a paper clip or similar object into the hole
on the base, as shown in Figure 12.
24
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT 4100/L GD4300
Configuring the Base Station
Figure 12. Disconnecting the Cable
Insert
Paper Clip
Connecting the Base when Security Pin is Enabled
When connecting the Base to a system that has a custom Security Pin enabled, follow the steps
below in the order shown:
1. Power down the host system.
2. Connect the appropriate interface cable into the Base as shown in Figure 11 on page 24.
3. Place the reader in the Base.
4. Power up the host. The reader will link to the Base.
5. When the host completely powers up, a new custom Security Pin Code may be sent to the
reader and Base, depending on host configuration. Contact Datalogic Technical Support for
more information.
To change security settings or set up a PIN, see BT Security Mode, starting on page
280.
Linking the Reader to a Base Station
RF Devices
For RF devices, before configuring the interface it is necessary to link the handheld with the
base. To link the handheld and the base, press the trigger to wake it and place it on the base. If
the reader was previously linked to another base, you must first scan the Unlink action
command before re-linking to the new base.
Unlink
Product Reference Guide
25
Setup
BT Models only
Remember: The mandatory condition for establishing a new linking between a BT handheld
and a BT base is that the handheld is unlinked and they share the same security configuration. A
successful link is indicated by three ascending tones from the reader. A high-low-high-low tone
indicates the link attempt was unsuccessful. A single green LED flash after this tone indicates no
Base Station was discovered. Two green LED flashes after this tone indicates that more than one
Base Station was discovered and the reader did not link. Three LED flashes after this tone
indicate a security error.
Linking a BT Reader to a PC
The reader can optionally be linked to a Bluetooth-enabled PC with the serial port profile, in
either server mode or client mode, or with human interface device profile (HID).
Linking to a PC in Server Mode (BT Slave Mode)
To link a BT reader in server mode to a Bluetooth-enabled PC, follow these steps:
1. Install any drivers provided with the Bluetooth adapter.
2. Scan the Link to a PC in Server Mode barcode to make the scanner visible to the host computer..
Link to a PC in Server Mode
3. Use the host computer’s Bluetooth manager to “Discover new devices” and select "Datalogic Scanner." If you receive an error message, it may be necessary to disable security on
the device.
4. Select “connect” on the PC to link the reader to the PC. Use an RS-232 terminal program
to see incoming data on the port designated by the computer's Bluetooth manager.
Linking to a PC in Client Mode (BT Master Mode)
The reader can optionally be linked in client mode to a Bluetooth-enabled PC with the serial
port profile. To do this, follow these steps:
1. Ensure the PC or terminal can network with Bluetooth devices and that it is powered on.
2. Ensure that a COM port is assigned under Services within the Bluetooth setup menu.
3. Create a Link label that contains the address of the PC Bluetooth adapter.
The Bluetooth address can be found under "Properties" within in
the Bluetooth setup menu.
NOTE
26
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT 4100/L GD4300
GRYPHON™ I System and Network Layouts
The link label is a Code 128 function 3 label with the following format:
<FN3 char>LnkB<12 character bluetooth address>
4. Scan the link label you created in step 3.
Linking to a PC in HID
1. Install any drivers provided with the Bluetooth adapter.
2. Scan the Link to a PC in HID barcode below to make the scanner visible to the host
computer.
Link to a PC in HID
3. Use the host computer's Bluetooth manager to "Discover new devices" and select "Datalogic Scanner." If you receive an error message, it may be necessary to disable security on
the device.
4. Select "connect" on the PC to link the reader to the PC. Use a text editing program to see
incoming data from the reader.
GRYPHON™ I System and Network Layouts
Stand Alone Layouts
Figure 13. Single Reader Layout
Product Reference Guide
27
Setup
Figure 14. Multiple Reader Layout
Gryphon M4100 only
(not valid for BT model)
In stand alone systems, each cradle is connected to a single Host.
Figure 15. Multiple Stand Alone Layouts
Gryphon M4100 only
(not valid for BT model)
Many stand alone connections can operate in the same physical area without interference,
provided all readers and cradles in the system have different addresses.
28
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT 4100/L GD4300
Interface Selection
Interface Selection
Upon completing the physical connection between the reader and its host, proceed to Table 1
starting on page 30 to select the interface type the reader is connected to (for example: RS-232,
Keyboard Wedge, USB, etc.). Scan the appropriate barcode in that section to configure your
system’s correct interface type.
Each reader model will support one of the following sets of host interfaces:
•
•
•
•
•
General Purpose Models
RS-232
RS-232 OPOS
USB
Keyboard Wedge
Wand Emulation
•
•
•
•
Retail Point of Sale Models
RS-232
RS-232 OPOS
USB
IBM 46XX
Setting the Interface
Scan the programming barcode from this section which selects the appropriate interface type
matching the system the reader will be connected to. Next, proceed to the corresponding
section in this manual (also listed in Table 1 starting on page 30) to configure any desired
settings and features associated with that interface.
Unlike some programming features and options, interface selections require that
you scan only one programming barcode label. DO NOT scan an ENTER/EXIT barcode prior to scanning an interface selection barcode.
Some interfaces require the scanner to start in the disabled state when powered
up. If additional scanner configuration is desired while in this state, pull the trigger and hold it for five seconds. The scanner will change to a state that allows programming with barcodes.
Product Reference Guide
29
Setup
Table 1. Available Interfaces
RS-232
FEATURES
RS-232 standard interface
Select RS232-STD
RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf
Set RS-232
Interface
Features
Select RS232-WN
starting on
page 41
RS-232 for use with OPOS/UPOS/JavaPOS
Select RS-232 OPOS
USB Com to simulate RS-232 standard interface
Select USB-COM-STDa
IBM
FEATURES
IBM-46xx Port 5B reader interface
Set IBM
Interface
Features
Select IBM-P5B
starting on
page 69
IBM-46xx Port 9B reader interface
Select IBM-P9B
USB-OEM
FEATURES
USB-OEM
(can be used for OPOS/UPOS/JavaPOS)
Select USB-OEM
Set USB-OEM
Interface
Features
starting on
page 67
a. Download the correct USB Com driver from www.datalogic.com
30
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT 4100/L GD4300
Interface Selection
KEYBOARD
FEATURES
AT, PS/2 25-286, 30-286, 50, 50Z, 60, 70, 80, 90 &
95 w/Standard Key Encoding
Select KBD-AT
Keyboard Wedge for IBM AT PS2 with standard
key encoding but without external keyboard
Select KBD-AT-NK
AT, PS/2 25-286, 30-286, 50, 50Z, 60, 70, 80, 90 &
95 w/Alternate Key
Select KBD-AT-ALT
Keyboard Wedge for IBM AT PS2 with alternate
key encoding but without external keyboard
Set KEYBOARD
WEDGE
Interface
Features
starting on
page 55
Select KBD-AT-ALT-NK
PC/XT w/Standard Key Encoding
Select KBD-XT
Keyboard Wedge for IBM Terminal 3153
Select KBD-IBM-3153
Product Reference Guide
31
Setup
KEYBOARD — cont.
FEATURES
Keyboard Wedge for IBM Terminals 31xx, 32xx,
34xx, 37xx make only keyboard
Select KBD-IBM-M
Keyboard Wedge for IBM Terminals 31xx, 32xx,
34xx, 37xx make break keyboard
Select KBD-IBM-MB
Keyboard Wedge for DIGITAL Terminals VT2xx,
VT3xx, VT4xx
Select KBD-DIG-VT
USB Keyboard with standard key encoding
Set KEYBOARD
WEDGE
Interface
Features
starting on page
55
Select USB Keyboard
USB Keyboard with alternate key encoding
Select USB Alternate Keyboard
USB Keyboard for Apple computers
Select USB-KBD-APPLE
WAND EMULATION
FEATURES
Set WAND
Interface
Features
Wand Emulation
Select WAND
32
starting on page
73
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT 4100/L GD4300
Customizing Configuration Settings
Customizing Configuration Settings
Configure Interface Settings
If after scanning the interface barcode from the previous table, your installation requires you to
select options to further customize your reader, turn to the appropriate section for your interface
type in "Configuration Using Barcodes" starting on page 37.
• "RS-232 ONLY Interface" on page 41
• "RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces" on page 46
• "Keyboard Interface" on page 55
• "USB-OEM Interface" on page 67
• "IBM 46XX Interface" on page 69
• "Wand Emulation Interface" on page 73
Global Interface Features
See "Global Interface Features" on page 39 for settings configurable by all interface types.
Configuring Other Features
If your installation requires different programming than the standard factory default settings,
the following sections of this manual allow configuration of non-interface-specific settings you
might require:
Reading Parameters: Reading Parameters include programming for scanning, beeper and LED
indicators and other universal settings.
Code Selection: Includes options concerning the barcode label types (symbologies). These
settings allow you to enable/disable symbologies, set label lengths, require check digit, etc.
Wireless Features: Contains programming options for RF and Bluetooth models only.
Laser Features: Describes options and programming specific to laser models.
Software Version Transmission
The software version of the device can be transmitted over the RS-232 and Keyboard interfaces
by scanning the following label.
Transmit Software Version
Product Reference Guide
33
Setup
Resetting the Product Configuration to Defaults
Restore Custom Defaults
If you aren’t sure what programming options are in your imager, or you’ve changed some
options and want to restore the Custom Default Configuration that may have been saved in the
scanner, scan the Restore Custom Default Configuration barcode below. This will restore the
custom configuration for the currently active interface.
Custom defaults are based on the interface type. Configure the imager
for the correct interface before scanning this label.
Restore Custom Default Configuration
Restore Factory Configuration
If you want to restore the Factory Configuration for your imager, scan either the Restore USA
Factory Configuration barcode or the Restore EU Factory Configuration barcode below. Both
labels restore the scanner configuration to the factory settings, including the interface type. The
USA label restores Label IDs to those historically used in the USA. The EU label restores Label
IDs to those historically used in Europe. The Label ID sets for USA and EU are shown in the
“Label ID” section on page 81 of this manual.
Restore USA Factory Configuration
Restore EU Factory Configuration
The programming items listed in the following sections show the factory default settings for
each of the menu commands.
34
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT 4100/L GD4300
Customizing Configuration Settings
Replacing the Battery
Before replacing the Battery, read "Battery Safety" starting on page 14. Datalogic recommends
annual replacement of rechargeable battery packs to ensure maximum performance.
To change the battery of your reader, complete the following instructions.
1. With a screwdriver, unscrew the battery cover screw.
2. Unscrew and remove the three screws securing the battery holder, and unplug the white
connector.
Screw
Connector
Screw
Screw
3. Carefully lift out the gold contacts circuit, and remove the battery holder while letting the
white connector pass through the hole in the battery holder (as shown in the picture
below).
Pass-through
hole
Product Reference Guide
35
Setup
4. Remove the old battery from its place (if present), and insert the new battery in the same
position.
5. Replace the battery holder and three screws, plug in the connector, and return the contacts
circuit to its previous location.
When inserting the new battery into the handle, take care to position the battery
and the connector as shown.
6. Insert the cover in the handle and screw it back into place.
Battery replacement is now complete.
36
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT 4100/L GD4300
Chapter 3
Configuration Using Barcodes
This and following sections provide programming barcodes to configure your reader by
changing the default settings. For details about additional methods of programming, see
Configuration Methods on page 16.
You must first enable your reader to read barcodes in order to use this
section. If you have not done this, go to Setup, starting on page 17 and
complete the appropriate procedure.
Configuration Parameters
Once the reader is set up, you can change the default parameters to meet your application needs.
Refer to "Standard Defaults" starting on page 335 for initial configuration in order to set the
default values and select the interface for your application.
The following configuration parameters are applicable to all Gryphon models covered in this
manual, unless otherwise indicated. The items are divided into logical groups, making it easy to
find the desired function based on its reference group.
Interface Configuration:
•
•
•
"RS-232 ONLY Interface" on page 41
"RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces" on page 46
"Keyboard Interface" on page 55
•
•
•
"USB-OEM Interface" on page 67
"IBM 46XX Interface" on page 69
"Wand Emulation Interface" on page 73
Parameters common to all interface applications:
•
•
"Data Format" on page 77 gives options to control the messages sent to the Host system.
"Reading Parameters" on page 91 control various operating modes and indicators status
functioning.
Symbology-specific parameters:
•
"Code Selection" on page 107 provides configuration of a personalized mix of codes, code
families and their options.
Model-specific parameters:
•
•
"Wireless Features" on page 257 offers configuration of radio control parameters for RF and
Bluetooth models.
"Laser Features" on page 287 provides options specific to laser models.
Product Reference Guide
37
Reading Configuration Barcodes
You must first enable your reader to read barcodes in order to use this
section. If you have not done this, go to Setup, starting on page 17 and
complete the appropriate procedure.
To program features:
1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING barcode, available at the top of each programming page, when applicable.
2. Scan the barcode to set the desired programming feature. You may need to cover unused
barcodes on the page, and possibly the facing page, to ensure that the reader reads only the
barcode you intend to scan.
3. If additional input parameters are needed, go to Appendix D, Keypad, and scan the appropriate characters from the keypad.
Additional information about many features can be found in the “References” chapter.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING barcode to exit Programming Mode.
For detailed descriptions, programming information and examples for setting selected
configuration items, see References, starting on page 291.
38
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Host Commands — Obey/Ignore
GLOBAL INTERFACE FEATURES
The following interface features are configurable by all interface types.
Host Commands — Obey/Ignore
This option specifies whether the reader will obey or ignore host commands. When set to
ignore, the reader will ignore all host commands except for those necessary for:
• service mode
• flash programming mode
• keeping the interface active
• transmission of labels.
DEFAULT
Host Commands = Obey
Host Commands = Ignore
USB Suspend Mode
This setting enables/disables the ability of USB interfaces to enter suspend mode.
DEFAULT
USB Suspend Mode = Disable
USB Suspend Mode = Enable
Product Reference Guide
39
Global Interface Features
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
NOTES
40
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
RS-232 ONLY INTERFACE
BAUD RATE on page 42
DATA BITS on page 43
STOP BITS on page 43
PARITY on page 44
HANDSHAKING CONTROL on page 45
Use the programming barcodes in this section if modifications to the standard RS-232 interface
settings are necessary to meet your system’s requirements. Additional settings which apply to
both the RS-232 and USB interfaces are available in the next section, "RS-232/USB-Com
Interfaces" starting on page 46.
Reference Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of standard factory settings.
Product Reference Guide
41
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Baud Rate
See page 291 for information on this feature.
Baud Rate = 1200
Baud Rate = 2400
Baud Rate = 4800
DEFAULT
Baud Rate = 9600
Baud Rate = 19,200
Baud Rate = 38,400
Baud Rate = 57,600
Baud Rate = 115,200
42
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Data Bits
Data Bits
This parameter allows the reader to interface with devices requiring a 7-bit or 8-bit ASCII
protocol for sending and receiving data.
7 Data Bits
DEFAULT
8 Data Bits
Stop Bits
Set the number of stop bits to match host device requirements. See page 291 for more
information on this feature.
DEFAULT
1 Stop Bit
2 Stop Bits
Product Reference Guide
43
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Parity
This feature specifies parity required for sending and receiving data. Select the parity type
according to host device requirements. See page 291 for more information.
DEFAULT
Parity = None
Parity = Even
Parity = Odd
44
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Handshaking Control
Handshaking Control
See page 291 for more information about this feature.
DEFAULT
Handshaking Control = RTS
Handshaking Control = RTS/CTS
Handshaking Control = RTS/XON/XOFF
Handshaking Control = RTS On/CTS
Handshaking Control = RTS/CTS Scan Control
Product Reference Guide
45
RS-232/USB-COM INTERFACES
INTERCHARACTER DELAY on page 47
BEEP ON ASCII BEL on page 47
BEEP ON NOT ON FILE on page 48
ACK NAK OPTIONS on page 49
ACK CHARACTER on page 50
NAK CHARACTER on page 50
ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE on page 51
ACK NAK RETRY COUNT on page 51
ACK NAK ERROR HANDLING on page 52
INDICATE TRANSMISSION FAILURE on page 52
DISABLE CHARACTER on page 53
ENABLE CHARACTER on page 53
The programming barcodes in this chapter allow modifications to the standard RS-232 and
USB-Com interfaces. Reference Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of standard factory
settings.
Product Reference Guide
46
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Intercharacter Delay
Intercharacter Delay
This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay between the end of one character and the
beginning of the next. The delay can be set within a range of zero (0) to 990 milliseconds in
10ms increments. A setting of zero specifies no delay.
See page 292 for more information.
Intercharacter Delay = No Delay
Select Intercharacter Delay Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
00 = No Intercharacter Delay
Beep On ASCII BEL
When this parameter is enabled, the reader issues a beep when a <BEL> character is detected on
the RS-232 serial line. <BEL> is issued to gain a user's attention to an illegal entry or other
important event.
DEFAULT
Beep On ASCII BEL = Disable
Beep On ASCII BEL = Enable
Product Reference Guide
47
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Beep On Not on File
This option enables/disables the action of the reader to sound a three beep sequence upon
receiving a Not-On-File (NOF) host command.
Beep On Not On File = Disable
DEFAULT
Beep On Not On File = Enable
48
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
ACK NAK Options
ACK NAK Options
This enables/disables the ability of the reader to support the RS-232 ACK/NAK protocol.
See page 293 for more information.
DEFAULT
ACK/NAK Protocol = Disable ACK/NAK
ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for label transmission
ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for host-command
acknowledge
ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for label transmission and hostcommand acknowledge
Product Reference Guide
49
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
ACK Character
This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the ACK character. ASCII
characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected. See page 293 for more information.
Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not
recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as 7 Data Bits.
Select ACK Character Setting
DEFAULT
0x06 ‘ACK’ Character
NAK Character
This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the NAK character. ASCII
characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected. See page 294 for more information.
Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not
recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as 7 Data Bits.
Select NAK Character Setting
DEFAULT
50
0x15 ‘NAK’ Character
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
ACK NAK Timeout Value
ACK NAK Timeout Value
This option specifies the amount of time the reader waits for an ACK character from the host
following label transmission. The selectable timeout range is 200 milliseconds to 15,000ms (15
seconds) in 200ms increments. A selection of 0 disables the timeout.
See page 295 for more information on setting this feature.
Select ACK NAK Timeout Value Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
01 ACK NAK Timeout value is 200ms
ACK NAK Retry Count
This feature specifies the number of times the reader retries a label transmission due to a retry
condition. The selectable range is from 1 to 254 retries. A selection of 0 disables the count, and
a selection of 255 specifies unlimited retries. See page 296 for more information.
Select ACK NAK Retry Count Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
Product Reference Guide
003 = 3 Retries
51
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
ACK NAK Error Handling
This feature specifies the method the reader uses to handle receive errors detected while waiting
for an ACK character from the host.
DEFAULT
ACK NAK Error Handling = Ignore Errors Detected
ACK NAK Error Handling = Process Error as Valid ACK Character
ACK NAK Error Handling = Process Error as
Valid NAK Character
Indicate Transmission Failure
This option enables/disables the reader’s ability to sound an error beep to indicate a
transmission failure while in ACK/NAK mode.
Indicate Transmission Failure = Disable Indication
DEFAULT
Indicate Transmission Failure = Enable Indication
52
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Disable Character
Disable Character
Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to disable the reader.
ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.
Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host
commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as
7 Data Bits.
See page 297 for more information on setting this feature.
Select Disable Character Setting
DEFAULT
0x44 = Disable Character is ‘D’
Enable Character
Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to enable the reader.
ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.
Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host
commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as
7 Data Bits.
See page 298 in “References” for more information on setting this feature.
Select Enable Character Setting
DEFAULT
Product Reference Guide
0x45 = Enable Character is ‘E’
53
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
NOTES
54
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
KEYBOARD INTERFACE
COUNTRY MODE on page 56
CAPS LOCK STATE on page 59
NUMLOCK on page 60
SEND CONTROL CHARACTERS on page 61
WEDGE QUIET INTERVAL on page 62
INTERCHARACTER DELAY on page 63
INTERCODE DELAY on page 64
USB KEYBOARD SPEED on page 65
USB KEYBOARD NUMERIC KEYPAD on page 66
Use the programming barcodes in this chapter to select options for USB Keyboard and Wedge
Interfaces. Reference Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of standard factory settings.
Information about control character emulation which applies to keyboard interfaces is listed in
Appendix E, Scancode Tables.
Product Reference Guide
55
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Country Mode
This feature specifies the country/language supported by the keyboard.
Only the following interfaces support ALL Country Modes.
• USB Keyboard (without alternate key encoding)
• AT, PS/2 25-286, 30-286, 50, 50Z, 60, 70, 80, 90 & 95 w/Std Key Encoding
• Keyboard Wedge for IBM AT PS2 with standard key encoding but without external keyboard
• AT, PS/2 25-286, 30-286, 50, 50Z, 60, 70, 80, 90 & 95 without Alternate Key
• Keyboard Wedge for IBM AT PS2 without alternate key encoding but without external
keyboard
• Bluetooth HID Profile
All other interfaces support ONLY the following Country Modes: U.S., Belgium, Britain,
France, Germany, Italy, Spain, Sweden.
DEFAULT
Country Mode = U.S.
Country Mode = Belgium
Country Mode = Britain
Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.
Country Mode = Croatia
Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature
description.
Country Mode = Czech Republic
56
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Country Mode
Country Mode — continued
Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.
Country Mode = Denmark
Country Mode = France
Country Mode = French Canadian
Country Mode = Germany
Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode
feature description.
Country Mode = Hungary
Country Mode = Italy
Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.
Country Mode = Japanese 106-key
Product Reference Guide
57
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Country Mode — continued
Country Mode = Lithuanian
Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature
description.
Country Mode = Norway
Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.
Country Mode = Poland
Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature
description.
Country Mode = Portugal
Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.
Country Mode = Romania
Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature
description.
Country Mode = Slovakia
Country Mode = Spain
58
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Caps Lock State
Country Mode — continued
Country Mode = Sweden
Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.
Country Mode = Switzerland
Caps Lock State
This option specifies the format in which the reader sends character data. This applies to
keyboard wedge interfaces and Bluetooth HID Profile. This does not apply when an alternate
key encoding keyboard is selected.
DEFAULT
Caps Lock State = Caps Lock OFF
Caps Lock State = Caps Lock ON
Caps Lock State = AUTO Caps Lock Enable
Product Reference Guide
59
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Numlock
This option specifies the setting of the Numbers Lock (Numlock) key while in keyboard wedge
interface. This only applies to alternate key encoding interfaces. It does not apply to USB
keyboard.
DEFAULT
Numlock = Numlock key unchanged
Numlock = Numlock key toggled
60
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Send Control Characters
Send Control Characters
This feature Specifies how the reader transmits ASCII control characters to the host. Reference
Appendix E, Scancode Tables for more information about control characters.
Options are as follows:
Control Character 00 . Characters from 00 to 0x1F are sent as control character Ctrl+Keys,
special keys are located from 0x80 to 0xA1.
Control Character 01 . Characters from 00 to 0x1F are sent as control character Ctrl+Capital
Key, special keys are located from 0x80 to 0xA1.
Control Character 02 . Special keys are located from 00 to 0x1F and characters from 0x80 to
0xFE are intended as an extended ASCII table (Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252 — see
"Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252"on page 363).
DEFAULT
Wedge Send Control Characters = 00
Wedge Send Control Characters = 01
Wedge Send Control Characters = 02
Product Reference Guide
61
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Wedge Quiet Interval
This option specifies the amount of time to look for keyboard activity before the reader breaks
the keyboard connection in order to transmit data to host. The selectable range for this feature is
from 0 to 990ms in 10ms increments.
This feature applies ONLY to the Keyboard Wedge interface.
See page 299 in “References” for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.
Select Wedge Quiet Interval Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
62
10 = Quiet Interval of 100 ms
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Intercharacter Delay
Intercharacter Delay
This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay between the end of one character and the
beginning of the next. The delay can be set within a range of zero (0) to 990 milliseconds in
10ms increments. A setting of zero specifies no delay.
This feature applies ONLY to the Keyboard Wedge interface and Bluetooth
HID Profile.
See page 300 in “References” for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.
Intercharacter Delay = No Delay
Select Intercharacter Delay Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
Product Reference Guide
00 = No Intercharacter Delay
63
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Intercode Delay
Specifies the delay between labels transmitted to the host for this interface. The selectable range
for this feature is from 0 to 99 seconds.
See page 301 in “References” for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.
Set Intercode Delay
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
64
00 = No Wedge Intercode Delay
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
USB Keyboard Speed
USB Keyboard Speed
This option specifies the USB poll rate for a USB keyboard.
This feature applies ONLY to the USB Keyboard interface.
DEFAULT
USB Keyboard Speed = 1ms
USB Keyboard Speed = 2ms
USB Keyboard Speed = 3ms
USB Keyboard Speed = 4ms
USB Keyboard Speed = 5ms
USB Keyboard Speed = 6ms
Product Reference Guide
65
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
USB Keyboard Speed — continued
USB Keyboard Speed = 7ms
USB Keyboard Speed = 8ms
USB Keyboard Speed = 9ms
USB Keyboard Speed = 10ms
USB Keyboard Numeric Keypad
This option Controls whether numeric characters will be sent using standard keys or the
numeric keypad.
DEFAULT
Standard Keys
Numeric Keypad
66
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
USB-OEM INTERFACE
USB-OEM DEVICE USAGE on page 68
INTERFACE OPTIONS on page 68
Feature settings for USB interfaces differ depending upon which host type the reader will be
connected with. Use the feature settings in this chapter and "IBM 46XX Interface"on page 69 to
specifically configure for the USB-OEM interface. Other USB interfaces are included in the
appropriate chapter for their host type.
Reference Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of standard factory settings.
Product Reference Guide
67
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
USB-OEM Device Usage
The USB-OEM protocol allows for the reader to be identified as one of two different types of
barcode scanners. Depending on what other scanners you may already have connected to a
USB-OEM POS, you may need to change this setting to enable all devices to communicate.
Options are:
• Table Top Scanner
• Handheld Scanner
It may be necessary to switch device usage when connecting two
readers/scanners of the same type to a POS system.
USB-OEM Device Usage = Table Top Scanner
DEFAULT
USB-OEM Device Usage = Handheld Scanner
Interface Options
This feature provides for an interface-specific control mechanism.
Obey Scanner Configuration Host Commands
DEFAULT
Ignore Scanner Configuration Host Commands
68
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
IBM 46XX INTERFACE
46XX NUMBER OF HOST RESETS on page 70
TRANSMIT LABELS IN CODE 39 FORMAT on page 72
INTERFACE OPTIONS on page 72
Use the barcodes in this section to configure programmable features for available IBM 46XX
interfaces.
Reference Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of standard factory settings.
Product Reference Guide
69
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
46xx Number of Host Resets
Specifies how many consecutive resets are processed before the reader starts a five-second period
to allow the user to enter Programming Mode and configure the reader. The configurable range
for this feature is 1 to 15 resets.
46xx Number of Host Resets = 1
46xx Number of Host Resets = 2
46xx Number of Host Resets = 3
46xx Number of Host Resets = 4
46xx Number of Host Resets = 5
DEFAULT
46xx Number of Host Resets = 6
46xx Number of Host Resets = 7
70
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
46xx Number of Host Resets
46xx Number of Host Resets — cont.
46xx Number of Host Resets = 8
46xx Number of Host Resets = 9
46xx Number of Host Resets = 10
46xx Number of Host Resets = 11
46xx Number of Host Resets = 12
46xx Number of Host Resets = 13
46xx Number of Host Resets = 14
46xx Number of Host Resets = 15
Product Reference Guide
71
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format
This feature enable/disables translation to Code 39 before transmitting label data to an IBM46XX or a USB-OEM host. Only the symbology identifier is modified for the translation. The
data is not converted to Code 39 or verified to be valid for Code 39.
Options are:
IBM Standard Format. Send labels in standard IBM format.
Code 39 Format. Translate the following symbologies to Code 39:
• USB-OEM: Code128, Code 93, and Codabar
• IBM-Port 5B: Code 128, Code 93, and Codabar
• IBM-Port 9B: Code 93 and Codabar
DEFAULT
Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format = IBM Standard Format
Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format = Code 39 Format
Interface Options
This feature provides for an interface-specific control mechanism.
Obey Scanner Configuration Host Commands
DEFAULT
Ignore Scanner Configuration Host Commands
72
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
WAND EMULATION INTERFACE
WAND SIGNAL SPEED on page 74
WAND POLARITY on page 74
WAND IDLE STATE on page 75
TRANSMIT NOISE on page 75
LABEL SYMBOLOGY CONVERSION on page 76
This chapter provides feature/settings configuration for the Wand Emulation interface.
Reference Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of standard factory settings.
Product Reference Guide
73
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Wand Signal Speed
This feature specifies the speed of the Wand output signal per nominal bar or space. Choices
are:
• 330 microseconds
• 660 microseconds
Wand Signal Speed = 330ms
DEFAULT
Wand Signal Speed = 660ms
Wand Polarity
This option specifies the polarity of the Wand output signal. Choices are:
• Quiet zones and spaces are high, bars are low
• Quiet zones and spaces are low, bars are high
TTL logic levels:
0V <= Low <= 0.7V
2.4V <= High <= 5.25V
Wand Polarity = Quiet Zones & Spaces High, Bars Low
DEFAULT
Wand Polarity = Quiet Zones & Spaces Low, Bars High
74
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Wand Idle State
Wand Idle State
This feature specifies the level of the Wand output signal when the reader is idle.
TTL logic levels:
0V <= Low <= 0.7V
2.4V <= High <= 5.25V
Wand Idle State = Low
DEFAULT
Wand Idle State = High
Transmit Noise
This option specifies the leading/trailing noise for the Wand interface.
DEFAULT
Transmit Noise = Disable
Transmit Noise = Transmit leading noise
Transmit Noise = Transmit trailing noise
Transmit Noise = Transmit leading and trailing noise
Product Reference Guide
75
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Label Symbology Conversion
When this feature is enabled for the Wand Emulation interface, all barcode labels are converted
to a single symbology.
Options are:
• No conversion
• Convert to Code 39 symbology
• Convert to Code 39 Full ASCII
• Convert to Code 128 symbology
DEFAULT
Label Symbology Conversion = No conversion
Label Symbology Conversion = Convert to Code 39
Label Symbology Conversion =
Convert to Code 39 Full ASCII
Label Symbology Conversion = Convert to Code 128
76
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
DATA FORMAT
GLOBAL PREFIX/SUFFIX on page 78
GLOBAL AIM ID on page 79
GS1-128 AIM ID on page 80
LABEL ID starting on page 81
•
•
•
•
•
Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets
Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology
Label ID Control
Label ID Symbology Selection
Set Global Mid Label ID Characters
CASE CONVERSION on page 90
CHARACTER CONVERSION on page 90
It is not recommended to use these features with IBM interfaces.
CAUTION
The features in this chapter can be used to build specific user-defined data into a message
string. See “References” starting on page 304 for more detailed instructions on setting these
features.
Product Reference Guide
77
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Global Prefix/Suffix
This option sets up to 20 characters each from the set of ASCII characters or any hex value from
00 to FF. The characters may be added as a prefix (in a position before the barcode data, also
called a header) and/or as a suffix (in a position following the barcode data, also called a footer).
See page 305 for more detailed instructions on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode above
to place the unit in Programming Mode, then the “Set Global Prefix” or “Set Global Suffix,”
barcode followed by the digits (in hex) from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad
representing your desired character(s). If less than the expected string of 20 characters are
selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode to terminate the string. Exit programming mode by
scanning the ENTER/EXIT barcode again.
Set Global Prefix
Set Global Suffix
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
78
No Global Prefix
Global Suffix = 0x0D (CR)
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Global AIM ID
Global AIM ID
This feature enables/disables addition of AIM IDs for all symbology
types.
AIM label identifiers (as opposed to custom characters you select yourself as with label
identifiers) can be included with scanned barcode data. AIM label identifiers consist of three
characters as follows:
• A close brace character (ASCII ‘]’), followed by...
• A code character (see the table below), followed by...
• A modifier character (the modifier character is symbol dependent).
SYMBOLOGY
CHAR
SYMBOLOGY
CHAR
UPC/EAN
Ea
Code 128/GS1-128
C
Code 39 and
Code 32
A
DataBar Omnidirectional,
DataBar Expanded
e
Codabar
F
Standard 2 of 5
S
Interleaved 2 of 5
I
ISBN
Xb
Code 93
G
Code 11
H
a. UPC-A and UPC-E labels are converted to EAN 13 when adding AIM IDs.
b. ISBN (X with a 0 modifier character)
DEFAULT
Global AIM ID = Disable
Global AIM ID = Enable
Product Reference Guide
79
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
GS1-128 AIM ID
If Global AIM ID is disabled, the AIM ID for GS1-128 can be enabled/disabled independently.
The AIM ID for GS1-128 is a ]C1, ]C2 or ]C3.
AIM IDs for other symbologies can be enabled/disabled independently as well. Contact
Customer Support for assistance
GS1-128 AIM ID = Disable
DEFAULT
GS1-128 AIM ID = Enable
80
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Label ID
Label ID
A Label ID is a customizable code of up to three ASCII characters (each can be one of hex 0x010xFF), used to identify a barcode (symbology) type. It can be appended previous to or following
the transmitted barcode data depending upon how this option is enabled. This feature provides
options for configuring custom Label IDs as a pre-loaded set (see "Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets"
below) or individually per symbology (see "Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology" on page 81).
If you wish to program the reader to always include an industry standard label identifier for ALL
symbology types, see the previous feature "Global AIM ID" on page 79.
See Label ID, starting on page 307 of “References” for more information on setting this feature.
Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets
The reader supports two pre-loaded sets of Label IDs. See Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets, starting on
page 307 for details on the USA set and the EU set.
CAUTION
When changing from one Label ID set to another, all other reader configuration settings, including the host interface type, will be erased and set to
the standard factory defaults. Any custom configuration or custom defaults
will be lost.
DEFAULT
Label ID Pre-loaded Set = USA Set
Label ID Pre-loaded Set = EU Set
Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology
This feature configures a Label ID individually for a single symbology. See Label ID: Set
Individually Per Symbology, starting on page 309 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Product Reference Guide
81
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Label ID Control
This option controls whether a Label ID is disabled, or sent as a prefix or suffix for a given
symbology type.
DEFAULT
Label ID Transmission = Disable
Label ID Transmission = Enable as Prefix
Label ID Transmission = Enable as Suffix
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
82
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Label ID Symbology Selection
Label ID Symbology Selection
This option selects the symbology for which a Label ID is to be configured. See "Label ID" on
page 81 or page 309 in “References” for more detailed instructions.
Set UPC-A Label ID Character(s)
Set UPC-A/P2 Label ID Character(s)
Set UPC-A/P5 Label ID Character(s)
Set UPC-A/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s)
Set UPC-E Label ID Character(s)
Set UPC-E/P2 Label ID Character(s)
Set UPC-E/P5 Label ID Character(s)
Product Reference Guide
83
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Label ID Symbology Selection — continued
Set UPC-E/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s)
Set EAN 13 Label ID Character(s)
Set EAN 13/P2 Label ID Character(s)
Set EAN 13/P5 Label ID Character(s)
Set EAN 13/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s)
Set EAN 8 Label ID Character(s)
Set EAN 8/P2 Label ID Character(s)
84
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Label ID Symbology Selection
Label ID Symbology Selection — continued
Set EAN 8/P5 Label ID Character(s)
Set EAN 8/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s)
Set GTIN Label ID Character(s)
Set GTIN/P2 Label ID Character(s)
Set GTIN/P5 Label ID Character(s)
Set GTIN/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s)
Set Code 39 Label ID Character(s)
Product Reference Guide
85
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Label ID Symbology Selection — continued
Set Code 32 Label ID Character(s)
Set Code 39 CIP Label ID Character(s)
Set Code 128 Label ID Character(s)
Set GS1-128 Label ID Character(s)
Set ISBT 128 Label ID Character(s)
Set Codablock F Label ID Character(s)
Set Interleaved 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)
Set Follett 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)
86
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Label ID Symbology Selection
Label ID Symbology Selection — continued
Set Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Label ID Character(s)
Set Standard 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)
Set Industrial 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)
Set IATA Label ID Character(s)
Set Datalogic 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)
Set Codabar Label ID Character(s)
Set ABC Codabar Label ID Character(s)
Product Reference Guide
87
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Label ID Symbology Selection — continued
Set Code 11 Label ID Character(s)
Set DataBar Omnidirectional Label ID Character(s)
Set DataBar Expanded Label ID Character(s)
Set DataBar Limited Label ID Character(s)
Set Code 93 Label ID Character(s)
Set MSI Label ID Character(s)
Set Plessey Label ID Character(s)
88
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Set Global Mid Label ID Characters
Label ID Symbology Selection — continued
Set Anker Plessey Label ID Character(s)
Set Code 4 Label ID Character(s)
Set Code 5 Label ID Character(s)
Set Global Mid Label ID Characters
Specifies mid-label ID that is added for transmission between the labels of a two-label pair.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode above
to place the unit in Programming Mode, then the “Set Global Mid Label ID Character(s)”
barcode followed by the digits (in hex) from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad
representing your desired character(s). If less than the expected string of 20 characters are
selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode to terminate the string. Exit programming mode by
scanning the ENTER/EXIT barcode again.
Set Global Mid Label ID Character(s)
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
Product Reference Guide
No Mid Label ID
Character (00)
89
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Case Conversion
This feature allows conversion of the case of all alphabetic characters to upper or lower case.
Case conversion affects ONLY scanned barcode data, and does not affect Label
ID, Prefix, Suffix, or other appended data.
DEFAULT
Case Conversion = Disable (no case conversion)
Case Conversion = Convert to upper case
Case Conversion = Convert to lower case
Character Conversion
Character conversion is an eight byte configuration item. The eight bytes are 4 character pairs
represented in hexadecimal ASCII values. The first character in the pair is the character that will
be converted. The second character in the pair is the character to convert to. If the character to
convert in a pair is FF, then no conversion is done.
If less than the expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/
EXIT barcode twice to accept the selections and exit Programming Mode.
Configure Character Conversion
DEFAULT
90
0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
(No character conversion)
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
READING PARAMETERS
DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT on page 92
GOOD READ LED DURATION on page 100
LABEL GONE TIMEOUT on page 93
SCAN MODE on page 101
SLEEP MODE TIMEOUT on page 94
STAND MODE TRIGGERED TIMEOUT on page 102
POWER ON ALERT on page 96
STAND DETECTION on page 103
GOOD READ: WHEN TO INDICATE on page 96 STAND MODE SENSITIVITY on page 104
GOOD READ BEEP TYPE on page 97
SCANNING ACTIVE TIME on page 104
GOOD READ BEEP FREQUENCY on page 97
FLASH ON TIME on page 105
GOOD READ BEEP LENGTH on page 98
FLASH OFF TIME on page 105
GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME on page 99
GREEN SPOT DURATION on page 106
Product Reference Guide
91
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Double Read Timeout
Double Read Timeout prevents a double read of the same label by setting the minimum time
allowed between reads of labels of the same symbology and data. If the unit reads a label and
sees the same label again within the specified timeout, the second read is ignored. Double Read
Timeout does not apply to scan modes that require a trigger pull for each label read.
Double Read Timeout = 0.1 Second
Double Read Timeout = 0.2 Second
Double Read Timeout = 0.3 Second
Double Read Timeout = 0.4 Second
Double Read Timeout = 0.5 Second
DEFAULT
Double Read Timeout = 0.6 Second
Double Read Timeout = 0.7 Second
92
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Label Gone Timeout
Double Read Timeout — continued
Double Read Timeout = 0.8 Second
Double Read Timeout = 0.9 Second
Double Read Timeout = 1 Second
Label Gone Timeout
This feature sets the time after the last label segment is seen before the reader prepares for a new
label. The timeout can be set within a range of 10 milliseconds to 2,550 milliseconds (2.55
seconds) in 10ms increments. Label Gone Timeout does not apply to scan modes that require a
trigger pull for each label that is read. See page 312 in “References” for detailed instructions and
examples for setting this feature.
Select Label Gone Timeout Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
Product Reference Guide
016 = Timeout of 160 ms
93
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Sleep Mode Timeout
This feature sets the amount of time that the reader will be idle before it enters into a low power
Sleep Mode. When in Sleep Mode the reader can no longer receive commands from the Host or
base station until it is woken up again by a trigger pull or being placed into a base station.
In order for the reader to enter Sleep Mode, the following conditions must be met:
Corded version (GD4100 only). RS-232 interface and trigger single, trigger multiple or trigger
pulse.
Mobile version (GM4100 only). Sleep state is allowed only on the handheld (not on the base)
when trigger single, trigger multiple or trigger pulse are set, and when the reader is not charging
the battery.
This feature is not applicable to the Gryphon Laser or Gryphon BT models
DEFAULT
Sleep Mode Timeout = Disable
Sleep Mode Timeout = 1 Second
Sleep Mode Timeout = 2 Seconds
Sleep Mode Timeout = 3 Seconds
Sleep Mode
$ Timeout = 4 Seconds
94
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Sleep Mode Timeout
Sleep Mode Timeout — continued
Sleep Mode Timeout = 5 Seconds
Sleep Mode$ Timeout = 6 Seconds
$ Timeout = 7 Seconds
Sleep Mode
Sleep Mode Timeout = 8 Seconds
Sleep Mode Timeout = 9 Seconds
Sleep Mode Timeout = 10 Seconds
Product Reference Guide
95
LED and Beeper Indicators
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
LED AND BEEPER INDICATORS
Power On Alert
Disables or enables the indication (from the Beeper) that the reader is receiving power.
Power On Alert = Disable (No Audible Indication)
DEFAULT
Power On Alert = Four Beeps
Good Read: When to Indicate
This feature specifies when the reader will provide indication (beep and/or flash its green LED)
upon successfully reading a barcode. .
This option, which uses CTS, is only valid for RS-232 interfaces.
This item is not configurable for the GM4100/GBT 4100 models.
DEFAULT
Indicate Good Read = After Decode
Indicate Good Read = After Transmit
Indicate Good Read = After CTS Goes Inactive, Then Active
96
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Good Read Beep Type
Good Read Beep Type
Specifies whether the good read beep has a mono or bitonal beep sound.
DEFAULT
Good Read Beep Type = Mono
Good Read Beep Type = Bitonal
Good Read Beep Frequency
Adjusts the good read beep to sound at a selectable low, medium or high frequency, selectable
from the list below. (Controls the beeper’s pitch/tone.)
Good Read Beep Frequency = Low
Good Read Beep Frequency = Medium
DEFAULT
Good Read Beep Frequency = High
Product Reference Guide
97
LED and Beeper Indicators
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Good Read Beep Length
Good Read Beep Length = 60 msec
DEFAULT
Good Read Beep Length = 80 msec
Good Read Beep Length = 100 msec
Good Read Beep Length = 120 msec
Good Read Beep Length = 140 msec
Good Read Beep Length = 160 msec
Good Read Beep Length = 180 msec
Good Read Beep Length = 200 msec
98
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Good Read Beep Volume
Good Read Beep Volume
Selects the beeper volume (loudness) upon a good read beep. There are three selectable volume
levels.
Good Read Beep Volume = Beeper Off
Good Read Beep Volume = Low
Good Read Beep Volume = Medium
DEFAULT
Good Read Beep Volume = High
Product Reference Guide
99
LED and Beeper Indicators
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Good Read LED Duration
This feature specifies the amount of time that the Good Read LED remains on following a good
read. The good read LED on time can be set within a range of 10 milliseconds to 2,550
milliseconds (0.001 to 2.55 seconds) in 100ms increments.
See page 313 in “References” for detailed instructions and examples for setting this feature.
Select Good Read LED Duration Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
003 = Good Read LED stays on for 300 ms
Indicators are dimmed during sleep.
100
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Scan Mode
SCANNING FEATURES
Scan Mode
Selects the reader’s scan operating mode. See page 314 in “References” for descriptions.
DEFAULT
Scan Mode = Trigger Single
Scan Mode = Trigger Hold Multiple
Scan Mode = Trigger Pulse Multiple
Scan Mode = Flashinga
Scan Mode = Always Onb
Scan Mode = Stand Modec
Scan Mode = Trigger Object Sense c
a. Recommended scan mode for Gryphon L for hands-free stand mode operation.
b. See "Laser Features" starting on page 287 for additional laser programmable timeout options.
c. Not applicable to the Gryphon L.
Product Reference Guide
101
Scanning Features
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout
This feature specifies the time to remain in Trigger Single mode after the trigger is pulled while
in Stand Mode.
This timeout is only used when the Scan Mode is configured as Stand Mode.
This feature is not applicable to the Gryphon L model.
DEFAULT
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 0.5 Seconds
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 1.5 Seconds
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 2 Seconds
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 3 Seconds
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 4 Seconds
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 6 Seconds
102
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Stand Detection
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout — continued
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 8 Seconds
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout =
Switch back to Trigger Single on trigger pull
Stand Detection
Specifies the behavior of the scanner when placed in a stand that contains autorecognition
hardware.
This feature is not applicable to the Gryphon L.
Ignore Autorecognition
DEFAULT
Switch to Stand Mode
Switch to Always On
Switch to Flashing
Product Reference Guide
103
Scanning Features
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Stand Mode Sensitivity
Sets the sensitivity level for stand mode wakeup. Choices are low, medium and high.
This feature is not applicable to the Gryphon L.
Stand Mode Sensitivity = Low
DEFAULT
Stand Mode Sensitivity = Medium
Stand Mode Sensitivity = High
Scanning Active Time
This setting specifies the amount of time that the reader stays in scan ON state once the state is
entered. The range for this setting is from 1 to 255 seconds in 1-second increments. See
page 315 in “References” for descriptions of each feature
Select Scanning Active Time Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
104
005 = Scanning is active for 5 Seconds
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Flash On Time
Flash On Time
This feature specifies the ON time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The selectable
range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond increments.See
page 316 in “References” for detailed information on setting this feature.
Select Flash ON Time Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
10 = Flash is ON for 1 Second
Flash Off Time
This feature specifies the OFF time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The selectable
range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond increments. See
page 317 in “References” for detailed information on setting this feature.
Select Flash OFF Time Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
Product Reference Guide
06 = Flash is OFF for 600ms
105
Scanning Features
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Green Spot Duration
Specifies the duration of the good read pointer beam after a good read.
Green Spot Duration = Disable (Green Spot is Off)
DEFAULT
Green Spot Duration = Short (300 msec)
Green Spot Duration = Medium (500 msec)
Green Spot Duration = Long (800 msec)
106
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
CODE SELECTION
The reader supports the following symbologies (barcode types). Symbology-dependent options
for each symbology are included in this chapter.
CODE EAN/UPC on page 109
• Coupon Control
• UPC-A
• UPC-E
• EAN 13 (Jan 13)
• ISSN
• EAN 8 (Jan 8)
• UPC/EAN Global Settings
STANDARD 2 OF 5 on page 178
INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 on page 184
• Code IATA
DATALOGIC 2 OF 5 on page 191
CODABAR on page 197
• ABC Codabar
CODE 11 on page 212
GS1 DATABAR™ OMNIDIRECTIONAL
on page 221
CODE 39 on page 136
• GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional
• Code 32 (ITAL Pharmaceutical Code)
• GS1 DataBar™ Expanded
• Code 39 CIP (French Pharmaceutical)
• GS1 DataBar™ Limited
CODE 128 on page 151
• GS1-128
CODE ISBT 128 on page 162
CODABLOCK F on page 165
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 (I 2 OF 5)
on page 169
CODE 93 on page 229
MSI on page 237
PLESSEY on page 243
CODE 4 on page 251
CODE 5 on page 252
• Follett 2 of 5
• Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR
Default settings are indicated at each feature/option with a green arrow. Also reference
Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of the most widely used set of standard factory
settings. That section also provides space to record any custom settings needed or implemented
for your system.
To set most features:
1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING barcode at the top of applicable programming pages.
2. Scan the correct barcode to set the desired programming feature or parameter. You may
need to cover unused barcodes on the page, and possibly the facing page, to ensure that
the reader reads only the barcode you intend to scan.
Product Reference Guide
107
Disable All Symbologies
3. If additional input parameters are needed, go to Appendix D, Keypad, and scan the appropriate characters from the keypad.
Additional information about many features can be found in the “References” chapter.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING barcode to exit Programming Mode.
DISABLE ALL SYMBOLOGIES
Use this feature to disable all symbologies.
1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING barcode below.
2. Scan the Disable All Symbologies barcode.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING barcode.
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Disable All Symbologies
This does not disable the reading of programming labels.
108
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Coupon Control
CODE EAN/UPC
Coupon Control
This feature is used to control the reader’s method of processing coupon labels.
Coupon Control = Allow all coupon barcodes to be decoded
DEFAULT
Coupon Control = Enable only UPCA coupon decoding
Coupon Control = Enable only GS1 DataBar™
coupon decoding
Product Reference Guide
109
Code EAN/UPC
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
UPC-A
The following options apply to the UPC-A symbology.
UPC-A Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read UPC-A barcodes.
UPC-A = Disable
DEFAULT
UPC-A = Enable
UPC-A Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with UPC-A barcode data.
UPC-A Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
DEFAULT
UPC-A Check Character Transmission = Send
110
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Expand UPC-A to EAN-13
Expand UPC-A to EAN-13
Expands UPC-A data to the EAN-13 data format. Selecting this feature also changes the
symbology ID to match those required for EAN-13.
DEFAULT
UPC-A to EAN-13 = Don’t Expand
UPC-A to EAN-13 = Expand
UPC-A Number System Character Transmission
This feature enables/disables transmission of the UPC-A number system character.
UPC-A Number System Character = Do not transmit
DEFAULT
UPC-A Number System Character = Transmit
Product Reference Guide
111
Code EAN/UPC
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
UPC-A Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a UPC-A label must be
decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
DEFAULT
UPC-A Minimum Reads = 1
UPC-A Minimum Reads = 2
UPC-A Minimum Reads = 3
UPC-A Minimum Reads = 4
112
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
UPC-E Enable/Disable
UPC-E
The following options apply to the UPC-E symbology.
UPC-E Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read UPC-E barcodes.
UPC-E = Disable
DEFAULT
UPC-E = Enable
UPC-E Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with UPC-E barcode data.
UPC-E Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
DEFAULT
UPC-E Check Character Transmission = Send
Product Reference Guide
113
UPC-E
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Expand UPC-E to EAN-13
Expands UPC-E data to the EAN-13 data format. Selecting this feature also changes the
symbology ID to match those required for EAN-13.
DEFAULT
UPC-E to EAN-13 = Don’t Expand
UPC-E to EAN-13 = Expand
Expand UPC-E to UPC-A
Expands UPC-E data to the UPC-A data format.
DEFAULT
UPC-E to UPC-A = Don’t Expand
UPC-E to UPC-A = Expand
114
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
UPC-E Number System Character Transmission
UPC-E Number System Character Transmission
This feature enables/disables transmission of the UPC-E system number character.
UPC-E Number System Character = Do not transmit
DEFAULT
UPC-E Number System Character = Transmit
UPC-E Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a UPC-E label must be decoded before it is
accepted as a good read.
UPC-E Minimum Reads = 1
DEFAULT
UPC-E Minimum Reads = 2
UPC-E Minimum Reads = 3
UPC-E Minimum Reads = 4
Product Reference Guide
115
GTIN Formatting
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
GTIN FORMATTING
This feature enables/disables the ability to convert UPC-E, UPC-A, EAN 8, and EAN 13 labels
into the GTIN 14-character format.
If add-on information is present on the base label prior to the conversion taking place, the add-on information will be appended to
the converted GTIN label.
DEFAULT
GTIN Formatting = Disable
GTIN Formatting = Enable
116
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
EAN 13 Enable/Disable
EAN 13 (JAN 13)
The following options apply to the EAN 13 (Jan 13) symbology.
EAN 13 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read EAN 13/JAN 13 barcodes.
EAN 13 = Disable
DEFAULT
EAN 13 = Enable
EAN 13 Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with EAN 13 barcode data.
EAN 13 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
DEFAULT
EAN 13 Check Character Transmission = Send
Product Reference Guide
117
EAN 13 (Jan 13)
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
EAN-13 Flag 1 Character
Enables/disables transmission of an EAN/JAN13 Flag1 character. The Flag 1 character is the
first character of the label.
EAN-13 Flag 1 Char= Don’t transmit
DEFAULT
EAN-13 Flag 1 Char= Transmit
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion
This option enables/disables conversion of EAN 13/JAN 13 Bookland labels starting with 978
to ISBN labels.
DEFAULT
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion = Disable
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion = Convert to ISBN
118
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
EAN 13 Minimum Reads
EAN 13 Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an EAN 13 label must be
decoded before it is accepted as good read.
DEFAULT
EAN 13 Minimum Reads = 1
EAN 13 Minimum Reads = 2
EAN 13 Minimum Reads = 3
EAN 13 Minimum Reads = 4
Product Reference Guide
119
ISSN
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
ISSN
The following options apply to the ISSN symbology.
ISSN Enable/Disable
Enables/disables conversion of EAN/JAN13 Bookland labels starting with 977 to ISSN labels.
DEFAULT
ISSN = Disable
ISSN = Enable
120
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
EAN 8 Enable/Disable
EAN 8 (JAN 8)
The following options apply to the EAN 8 (Jan 8) symbology.
EAN 8 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read EAN 8/JAN 8 barcodes.
EAN 8 = Disable
DEFAULT
EAN 8 = Enable
EAN 8 Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with EAN 8 barcode data.
EAN 8 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
DEFAULT
EAN 8 Check Character Transmission = Send
Product Reference Guide
121
EAN 8 (Jan 8)
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13
Enable this option to expand EAN 8/JAN 8 labels to EAN 13/JAN 13.
DEFAULT
Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13 = Disable
Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13 = Enable
EAN 8 Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an EAN 8 (Jan 8) label must
be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
DEFAULT
EAN 8 Minimum Reads = 1
EAN 8 Minimum Reads = 2
EAN 8 Minimum Reads = 3
EAN 8 Minimum Reads = 4
122
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
UPC/EAN Decoding Level
UPC/EAN GLOBAL SETTINGS
This section provides configuration settings for UPC-A, UPC-E, EAN 13 and EAN 8
symbologies, and affects all of these unless otherwise marked for each feature description.
UPC/EAN Decoding Level
Decoding Levels are used to configure a barcode symbology decoder to be very aggressive to
very conservative depending on a particular customer’s needs.
See page 302 for more information on this feature.
UPC/EAN Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative)
DEFAULT
UPC/EAN Decoding Level = 2
UPC/EAN Decoding Level = 3
UPC/EAN Decoding Level = 4
UPC/EAN Decoding Level = 5 (Aggressive)
Product Reference Guide
123
UPC/EAN Global Settings
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
UPC/EAN Correlation
When correlation is enabled, the reader will combine label data from multiple scans when
decoding. This will help the scanner read labels that have spots, voids and/or damaged areas.
Enabling correlation will also increase the chances that a label will be read incorrectly.
DEFAULT
UPC/EAN Correlation = Disable
UPC/EAN Correlation = Enable
UPC/EAN Price Weight Check
This feature enables/disables calculation and verification of price/weight check digits.
DEFAULT
Price Weight Check = Disabled
Price Weight Check = 4-digit price-weight check
Price Weight Check = 5-digit price-weight check
Price Weight Check = European 4-digit price-weight check
Price Weight Check = European 5-digit price-weight check
124
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
In-Store Minimum Reads
In-Store Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an in-store label must be
decoded before it is accepted as good read.
In-store labels are defined as UPC-A labels with a number-system character of 2 or 4 as well as
EAN 8 and EAN 13 labels with a Flag1 character of 2 or an EAN 13 label starting with the
three characters '980'.
In-Store Minimum Reads = 1
DEFAULT
In-Store Minimum Reads = 2
In-Store Minimum Reads = 3
In-Store Minimum Reads = 4
Product Reference Guide
125
Add-Ons
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
ADD-ONS
Contact Customer Support for advanced programming of optional and conditional add-ons.
Optional Add-ons
The reader can be enabled to optionally read the following add-ons (supplementals):
If a UPC/EAN base label and an add-on are both decoded, the reader will
transmit the base label and add-on. If a UPC/EAN base label is decoded
without an add-on, the base label will be transmitted without an add-on.
Conditional add-on settings (if enabled) are considered by the reader
before optional add-on settings.
DEFAULT
Optional Add-Ons = Disable P2
Optional Add-Ons = Enable P2
DEFAULT
Optional Add-Ons = Disable P5
Optional Add-Ons = Enable P5
DEFAULT
Optional Add-Ons = Disable GS1-128
Optional Add-Ons = Enable GS1-128
126
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Optional Add-On Timer
Optional Add-On Timer
This option sets the time the reader will look for an add-on when an add-on fragment has been
seen and optional add-ons are enabled. (Also see "Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer" on page 130.)
Optional Add-on Timer = 10ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 20ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 30ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 40ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 50ms
Product Reference Guide
127
Add-Ons
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Optional Add-On Timer — cont.
Optional Add-on Timer = 60ms
DEFAULT
Optional Add-on Timer = 70ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 100ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 120ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 140ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 160ms
128
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Optional Add-On Timer
Optional Add-On Timer — cont.
Optional Add-on Timer = 180ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 200ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 220ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 240ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 260ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 280ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 300ms
Product Reference Guide
129
Add-Ons
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer
This option sets the timer expiration value to read the added part after reading the linear EAN/
UPC part. For UPC/EAN add-ons other than those of that type, see "Optional Add-On Timer" on
page 127.
DEFAULT
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = Disable
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 10ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 20ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 30ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 40ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 50ms
130
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer — cont.
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 60ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 70ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 100ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 120ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 140ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 160ms
Product Reference Guide
131
Add-Ons
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer — cont.
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 180ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 200ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 220ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 240ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 260ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 280ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 300ms
132
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads
P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of times a P2 add-on must be read before it is
marked as valid and then combined with a base label.
P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 1
DEFAULT
P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 2
P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 3
P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 4
Product Reference Guide
133
Add-Ons
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of times a P5 add-on must be read before it is
marked as valid and then combined with a base label.
DEFAULT
P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 1
P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 2
P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 3
P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 4
134
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads
GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of times an GS1-128 add-on must be read before it
is marked as valid and then combined with a base label.
DEFAULT
GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 1
GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 2
GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 3
GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 4
Product Reference Guide
135
Code 39
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
CODE 39
The following options apply to the Code 39 symbology.
Code 39 Enable/Disable
Code 39 = Disable
DEFAULT
Code 39 = Enable
Code 39 Check Character Calculation
Enable this option to enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Code 39 check
character. When disabled, any check character in the label is treated as a data character
DEFAULT
Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Don’t Calculate
Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Calculate Std Check
Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Calculate Mod 7 Check
136
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 39 Check Character Transmission
Code 39 Check Character Calculation — cont.
Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Enable Italian Post Check
Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Enable Daimler
Chrysler Check
Code 39 Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Code 39 barcode data.
Code 39 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
DEFAULT
Code 39 Check Character Transmission = Send
Product Reference Guide
137
Code 39
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission
Enable this option to enable/disable transmission of Code 39 start and stop characters.
DEFAULT
Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission = Don’t Transmit
Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission = Transmit
Code 39 Full ASCII
Enables/disables the translation of Code 39 characters to Code 39 full-ASCII characters.
DEFAULT
Code 39 Full ASCII = Disable
Code 39 Full ASCII = Enable
138
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 39 Quiet Zones
Code 39 Quiet Zones
This feature specifies the number of quiet zones for Code 39 labels. Quiet zones are blank areas
at the ends of a barcode, typically 10 times the width of the narrowest bar or space in the label.
Code 39 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zone on one side
Code 39 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides
DEFAULT
Code 39 Quiet Zones = Auto
Code 39 Quiet Zones = Virtual Quiet Zones on two sides
Code 39 Quiet Zones = Small Quiet Zones on two sides
Product Reference Guide
139
Code 39
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 39 Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Code 39 label must be
decoded before it is accepted as good read.
Code 39 Minimum Reads = 1
DEFAULT
Code 39 Minimum Reads = 2
Code 39 Minimum Reads = 3
Code 39 Minimum Reads = 4
140
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 39 Decoding Level
Code 39 Decoding Level
Decoding Levels are used to configure a barcode symbology decoder to be very aggressive to
very conservative depending on a particular customer’s needs. See page 302 for more
information on this feature.
This configuration item applies to Code 39 and Code 32.
Code 39 Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative)
Code 39 Decoding Level = 2
DEFAULT
Code 39 Decoding Level = 3
Code 39 Decoding Level = 4
Code 39 Decoding Level = 5 (Aggressive)
Product Reference Guide
141
Code 39
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 39 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Code 39
symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.
DEFAULT
Code 39 Length Control = Variable Length
Code 39 Length Control = Fixed Length
142
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 39 Set Length 1
Code 39 Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Code 39 Length Control. Length 1 is the
minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Length includes the barcode’s data characters only. The length can be set from 0 to 50
characters.
Table 2 provides examples for setting Length 1. See page 302 for detailed instructions on setting
this feature.
Table 2. Code 39 Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
1
Desired Setting
EXAMPLES
00 Characters
07 Characters
15 Characters
2
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3
Scan SELECT CODE 39 LENGTH 1 SETTING
4
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
5
‘0’ and ‘0’
‘0’ and ‘7’
‘1’ and ‘5’
50 Characters
‘5’ AND ‘0’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select Code 39 Set Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
Product Reference Guide
02 = Length 1 is 2 Characters
143
Code 39
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 39 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Code 39 Length Control. Length 2 is the
maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Length includes the barcode’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length
does not include start/stop characters.
Table 3 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 303 for detailed instructions on setting
this feature.
Table 3. Code 39 Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
1
Desired Setting
EXAMPLES
00 (Ignore This
Length)
07 Characters
15 Characters
2
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3
Scan SELECT CODE 39 LENGTH 2 SETTING
4
5
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
‘0’ and ‘0’
‘0’ and ‘7’
‘1’ and ‘5’
50 Characters
‘5’ AND ‘0’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select Code 39Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
144
50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio
This feature specifies the ratio between an intercharacter space and module for Code 39 labels.
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = Disable
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 1
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 2
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 3
DEFAULT
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 4
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 5
Product Reference Guide
145
Code 39
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio — cont.
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 6
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 7
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 8
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 9
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 10
146
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 39 Character Correlation
Code 39 Character Correlation
When correlation is enabled, the barcode reader will combine label data from multiple scans
when decoding. Enabling correlation will help the scanner read labels that have some spots and/
or voids. It may also help read labels that have damaged areas. Enabling correlation will also
increase the chances that a label will be read incorrectly.
DEFAULT
Code 39 Character Correlation = Disable
Code 39 Character Correlation = Enable
Code 39 Stitching
This option enables/disables stitching for Code 39 labels. When parts of a Code 39 barcode are
presented to the reader with this feature enabled, the barcode parts will be assembled by the
reader’s software, and the data will be decoded if all barcode proofing requirements are met.
Code 39 Stitching = Disable
DEFAULT
Code 39 Stitching = Enable
Product Reference Guide
147
Code 32 (ITAL Pharmaceutical Code)
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
CODE 32 (ITAL PHARMACEUTICAL CODE)
The following options apply to the Code 32 (Italian Pharmaceutical Code) symbology.
Code 32 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Code 32 barcodes.
DEFAULT
Code 32 = Disable
Code 32 = Enable
Code 32 Feature Setting Exceptions
The following features are set for Code 32 by using these Code 39 settings:
"Code 39 Quiet Zones" on page 139
"Code 39 Minimum Reads" on page 140
"Code 39 Decoding Level" on page 141
"Code 39 Interdigit Ratio" on page 145
"Code 39 Character Correlation" on page 147
"Code 39 Stitching" on page 147
148
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 32 Check Char Transmission
Code 32 Check Char Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Code 32 barcode data.
DEFAULT
Code 32 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
Code 32 Check Character Transmission = Send
Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission
This option enables/disables transmission of Code 32 start and stop characters.
DEFAULT
Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission = Don’t Transmit
Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission = Transmit
Product Reference Guide
149
Code 39 CIP (French Pharmaceutical)
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
CODE 39 CIP (FRENCH PHARMACEUTICAL)
The following options apply to the Code 39 CIP symbology.
Code 39 CIP Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of the reader to decode Code 39 CIP labels.
DEFAULT
Code 39 CIP = Disable
Code 39 CIP = Enable
150
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 128 Enable/Disable
CODE 128
The following options apply to the Code 128 symbology.
Code 128 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Code 128 barcodes.
Code 128 = Disable
DEFAULT
Code 128 = Enable
Expand Code 128 to Code 39
This feature enables/disables expansion of Code 128 labels to Code 39 labels.
DEFAULT
Code 128 to Code 39 = Don’t Expand
Code 128 to Code 39 = Expand
Product Reference Guide
151
Code 128
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 128 Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Code 128 barcode data.
DEFAULT
Code 128 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
Code 128 Check Character Transmission = Send
Code 128 Function Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of Code128 function characters 1, 2, 3, and 4.
DEFAULT
Code 128 Function Character Transmission = Don’t Send
Code 128 Function Character Transmission = Send
152
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 128 Sub-Code Change Transmission
Code 128 Sub-Code Change Transmission
Enables/disables the transmission of “Sub-Code exchange” characters (NOT transmitted by
standard decoding).
DEFAULT
Code 128 Sub-Code Change Transmission = Disable
Code 128 Sub-Code Change Transmission = Enable
Product Reference Guide
153
Code 128
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 128 Quiet Zones
This feature specifies the number of quiet zones for Code 128 labels. Quiet zones are blank areas
at the ends of a barcode and are typically 10 times the width of the narrowest bar or space in the
label.
Code 128 Quiet Zones = No Quiet Zones
Code 128 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zone on one side
Code 128 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides
DEFAULT
Code 128 Quiet Zones = Auto
Code 128 Quiet Zones = Virtual Quiet Zones on two sides
154
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 128 Minimum Reads
Code 128 Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Code 128 label must be
decoded before it is accepted as good read.
DEFAULT
Code 128 Minimum Reads = 1
Code 128 Minimum Reads = 2
Code 128 Minimum Reads = 3
Code 128 Minimum Reads = 4
Product Reference Guide
155
Code 128
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 128 Decoding Level
Decoding Levels are used to configure a barcode symbology decoder to be very aggressive to
very conservative depending on a particular customer’s needs. See page 302 for more
information on this feature.
Code 128 Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative)
Code 128 Decoding Level = 2
DEFAULT
Code 128 Decoding Level = 3
Code 128 Decoding Level = 4
Code 128 Decoding Level = 5 (Aggressive)
156
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 128 Length Control
Code 128 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Code 128
symbology. See page 302 for more information..
DEFAULT
Code 128 Length Control = Variable Length
Code 128 Length Control = Fixed Length
Product Reference Guide
157
Code 128
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 128 Set Length 1
Specifies one of the barcode lengths for Code 128 Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label
length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length
includes the barcode’s data characters only. The length can be set from 1 to 80 characters.
Table 4 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 302 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 4. Code 128 Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
1
Desired Setting
EXAMPLES
01 Character
07 Characters
15 Characters
2
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3
Scan SELECT CODE 128 LENGTH 1 SETTING
4
5
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
‘0’ and ‘1’
‘0’ and ‘7’
‘1’ and ‘5’
80 Characters
‘8’ AND ‘0’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select Code 128 Set Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
158
01 = Length 1 is 1 Character
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 128 Set Length 2
Code 128 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Code 128 Length Control. Length 2 is the
maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Length includes the barcode’s data characters only.
The length can be set from 1 to 80 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only
one fixed length).
Table 5 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 303 for detailed instructions on setting
this feature.
Table 5. Code 128 Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
1
Desired Setting
EXAMPLES
00 (Ignore This
Length)
07 Characters
15 Characters
2
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3
Scan SELECT CODE 128 LENGTH 2 SETTING
4
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
5
‘0’ and ‘0’
‘0’ and ‘7’
‘0’ and ‘F’
80 Characters
‘5’ AND 0’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
.
Select Code 128 Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
Product Reference Guide
80 = Length 2 is 80 Characters
159
Code 128
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 128 Character Correlation
When correlation is enabled, the barcode reader will combine label data from multiple scans
when decoding. Enabling correlation will help the scanner read labels that have some spots and/
or voids. It may also help read labels that have damaged areas. Enabling correlation will also
increase the chances that a label will be read incorrectly.
DEFAULT
Code 128 Character Correlation = Disable
Code 128 Character Correlation = Enable
Code 128 Stitching
This option enables/disables stitching for Code 128 labels. When parts of a Code 128 barcode
are presented to the reader with this feature enabled, the barcode parts will be assembled by the
reader’s software, and the data will be decoded if all barcode proofing requirements are met.
Code 128 Stitching = Disable
DEFAULT
Code 128 Stitching = Enable
160
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
GS1-128 Enable
GS1-128
The following options apply to the GS1-128 symbology. (Also known as USS-128, GS1-128,
GTIN-128, UCC-128, EAN-128.)
GS1-128 Enable
This option enables/disables the ability of the reader to translate GS1-128 labels to the GS1-128
data format. Options are:
• Transmit GS1-128 labels in Code 128 data format.
• Transmit GS1-128 labels in GS1-128 data format.
• Do not transmit GS1-128 labels.
GS1-128 = Transmit in Code 128 data format
DEFAULT
GS1-128 = Transmit in GS1-128 data format
GS1-128 = Do not transmit GS1-128 labels
Product Reference Guide
161
Code ISBT 128
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
CODE ISBT 128
The following options apply to the ISBT 128 symbology.
ISBT 128 Concatenation
Use this option to enable/disable ISBT128 concatenation of 2 labels.
DEFAULT
ISBN 128 Concatenation = Disable
ISBN 128 Concatenation = Enable
ISBT 128 Force Concatenation
When enabled, this feature forces concatenation for ISBT.
This option is only valid when ISBT 128 Concatenation is enabled .
DEFAULT
ISBT 128 Force Concatenation = Disable
ISBT 128 Force Concatenation = Enable
162
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode
ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode
Specifies the concatenation mode between Static and Dynamic.
This option is only valid when ISBT 128 Concatenation is enabled (see page 162).
DEFAULT
ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode = Static
ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode = Dynamic
Product Reference Guide
163
Code ISBT 128
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout
Specifies the timeout used by the ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Mode.
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 50 msec
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 100 msec
DEFAULT
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 200 msec
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 500 msec
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 750 msec
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 1 second
ISBT 128 Advanced Concatenation Options
To set up pairs of label types for concatenation, use the Datalogic Aladdin configuration
application or contact Datalogic Technical Support, as described on page 10.
164
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Codablock F Enable/Disable
CODABLOCK F
The following options apply to the Codablock F symbology.
Codablock F Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Codablock F labels.
DEFAULT
Codablock F = Disable
Codablock F = Enable
Codablock F EAN Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables the Codablock F EAN subtype (code with FNC1 in the first position)..
DEFAULT
Codablock F EAN = Disable
Codablock F EAN = Enable
Product Reference Guide
165
Codablock F
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Codablock F AIM Check
Specifies if Check Digit calculation algorithm is AIM compliant or not.
Codablock F AIM Check = Disable
DEFAULT
Codablock F AIM Check = Enable Check C
Codablock F Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Codablock
F symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.
DEFAULT
Codablock F Length Control = Variable Length
Codablock F = Fixed Length
166
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Codablock F Set Length 1
Codablock F Set Length 1
Specifies one of the barcode lengths for Codablock F Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum
label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length
includes the barcode’s data characters only. Characters can be set from 03 to 255 characters.
Table 6 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 302 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 6. CODABLOCK F Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
1
Desired Setting
EXAMPLES
03 Characters
07 Characters
15 Characters
2
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3
Scan SELECT CODABLOCK F LENGTH 1 SETTING
4
Scan Three Characters From
‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘3’
Appendix D, Keypad
5
‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘7’
‘0’,‘1’ and ‘5’
50 Characters
‘0’,‘5’ AND ‘0’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select Codablock F Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the
entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
Product Reference Guide
03 = Length 1 is 3 Characters
167
Codablock F
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Codablock F Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Codablock F Length Control. Length 2 is the
maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Length includes the barcode’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length
does not include start/stop characters.
Table 7 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 303 for detailed instructions on setting
this feature.
Table 7. CODABLOCK F Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
1
Desired Setting
EXAMPLES
00 (Ignore This
Length)
07 Characters
15 Characters
2
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3
Scan SELECT CODABLOCK F LENGTH 2 SETTING
4
Scan Three Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
5
‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘0’
‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘7’
‘0’,‘1’ and ‘5’
50 Characters
‘0’,‘5’ AND ‘0’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select Codablock F Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the
entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
168
100 = Length 2 is 100 Characters
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
I 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 (I 2 OF 5)
The following options apply to the I 2 of 5 symbology.
I 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read I 2 of 5 barcodes.
DEFAULT
I 2 of 5 = Disable
I 2 of 5 = Enable
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
This option enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional I 2 of 5 check character.
DEFAULT
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check Standard
(Modulo 10)
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check German Parcel
Product Reference Guide
169
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation - cont.
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check DHL
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check Daimler Chrysler
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check Bosch
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Italian Post
I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with I 2 of 5 barcode data.
I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
DEFAULT
I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Send
170
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads
I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an I 2 of 5 label must be
decoded before it is accepted as good read.
I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 1
DEFAULT
I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 2
I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 3
I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 4
Product Reference Guide
171
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
2 of 5 Decoding Level
This configuration item applies to Interleaved 2 of 5, Datalogic 2 of 5 and Standard 2 of 5.
Decoding Levels are used to configure a barcode symbology decoder to be very aggressive to
very conservative depending on a particular customer’s needs. See page 302 for more
information on this feature.
2 of 5 Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative)
2 of 5 Decoding Level = 2
DEFAULT
2 of 5 Decoding Level = 3
2 of 5 Decoding Level = 4
2 of 5 Decoding Level = 5 (Aggressive)
172
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
I 2 of 5 Length Control
I 2 of 5 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the I 2 of 5
symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.
DEFAULT
I 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length
I 2 of 5 Length Control = Fixed Length
Product Reference Guide
173
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
I 2 of 5 Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for I 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 1 is the
minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. The length includes the barcode’s check and data characters. The length can be set from
2 to 50 characters in increments of two.
Table 8 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 302 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 8. I 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Setting
2 Characters
6 Characters
14 Characters
50 Characters
2
Pad with leading zeroes to
yield two digits
02
06
14
50
‘1’ and ‘4’
‘5’ AND ‘0’
3
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4
Scan SELECT I 2 of 5 LENGTH 1 SETTING
5
6
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
‘0’ and ‘2’
‘0’ and ‘6’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select I 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
174
06 = Length 1 is 6 Characters
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
I 2 of 5 Set Length 2
I 2 of 5 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for I 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 2 is the
maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. The length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
The length can be set from 2 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only
one fixed length).
Table 9 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 303 for detailed instructions on setting
this feature.
Table 9. I 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Setting
Ignore This
Length
4 Characters
14 Characters
50 Characters
2
Pad with leading zeroes to
yield two digits
00
04
14
50
‘1’ and ‘4’
‘5’ AND ‘0’
3
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4
Scan SELECT I 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 SETTING
5
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
6
‘0’ and ‘0’
‘0’ and ‘4’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select I 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
Product Reference Guide
50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters
175
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
I 2 of 5 Character Correlation
When correlation is enabled, the barcode reader will combine label data from multiple scans
when decoding. Enabling correlation will help the scanner read labels that have some spots and/
or voids. It may also help read labels that have damaged areas. Enabling correlation will also
increase the chances that a label will be read incorrectly.
DEFAULT
I 2 of 5 Character Correlation = Disable
I 2 of 5 Character Correlation = Enable
I 2 of 5 Stitching
This option enables/disables stitching for I 2 of 5 labels. When parts of a I 2 of 5 barcode are
presented to the reader with this feature enabled, the barcode parts will be assembled by the
reader’s software, and the data will be decoded if all barcode proofing requirements are met.
DEFAULT
I 2 of 5 Stitching = Disable
I 2 of 5 Stitching = Enable
176
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
FOLLETT 2 OF 5
The following options apply to the Follett 2 of 5 symbology.
Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of imager to decode Follett 2 of 5 labels.
DEFAULT
Follett 2 of 5 = Disable
Follett 2 of 5 = Enable
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 CIP HR
The following options apply to the Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR symbology.
Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR labels.
DEFAULT
Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR = Disable
Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR = Enable
Product Reference Guide
177
Standard 2 of 5
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
STANDARD 2 OF 5
The following options apply to the Standard 2 of 5 symbology.
Standard 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Standard 2 of 5 barcodes.
DEFAULT
Standard 2 of 5 = Disable
Standard 2 of 5 = Enable
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
This option enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Standard 2 of 5 check
character.
DEFAULT
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Enable
178
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
This feature enables/disables transmission of an optional Standard 2 of 5 check character.
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
DEFAULT
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Send
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Standard 2 of 5 label must
be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 1
DEFAULT
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 2
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 3
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 4
Product Reference Guide
179
Standard 2 of 5
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Standard 2 of 5 Decoding Level
The Standard 2 of 5 Decoding Level feature is set using "2 of 5 Decoding
Level" on page 172.
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Standard 2
of 5 symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.
DEFAULT
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control = Fixed Length
180
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 1
Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Standard 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 1 is
the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters. The length can be set from 1 to
50 characters.
Table 10 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 302 if you want detailed
instructions on setting this feature.
Table 10. Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
1
Desired Setting
EXAMPLES
01 Character
07 Characters
15 Characters
2
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3
Scan SELECT STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 1 SETTING
4
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
5
‘0’ and ‘1’
‘0’ and ‘7’
‘1’ and ‘5’
50 Characters
‘5’ AND ‘0’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
Product Reference Guide
08 = Length 1 is 8 Characters
181
Standard 2 of 5
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Standard 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 2 is
the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed
Length Mode. Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only
one fixed length).
Table 11 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 303 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 11. Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Setting (pad with
leading zeroes)
00 (Ignore This
Length)
07 Characters
15 Characters
2
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3
Scan SELECT STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 SETTING
4
5
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
‘0’ and ‘0’
‘0’ and ‘7’
‘1’ and ‘5’
50 Characters
‘5’ AND ‘0’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
182
50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Standard 2 of 5 Character Correlation
Standard 2 of 5 Character Correlation
When correlation is enabled, the barcode reader will combine label data from multiple scans
when decoding. Enabling correlation will help the scanner read labels that have some spots and/
or voids. It may also help read labels that have damaged areas. Enabling correlation will also
increase the chances that a label will be read incorrectly.
DEFAULT
Standard 2 of 5 Character Correlation = Disable
Standard 2 of 5 Character Correlation = Enable
Standard 2 of 5 Stitching
This option enables/disables stitching for Standard 2 of 5 labels. When parts of a Standard 2 of
5 barcode are presented to the reader with this feature enabled, the barcode parts will be
assembled by the reader’s software, and the data will be decoded if all barcode proofing
requirements are met.
DEFAULT
Standard 2 of 5 Stitching = Disable
Standard 2 of 5 Stitching = Enable
Product Reference Guide
183
Industrial 2 of 5
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5
The following options apply to the Industrial 2 of 5 symbology.
Industrial 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Industrial 2 of 5 labels.
DEFAULT
Industrial 2 of 5 = Disable
Industrial 2 of 5 = Enable
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
Enables/Disables calculation and verification of an optional Industrial 2 of 5 check character.
DEFAULT
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Enable
184
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an Industrial 2 of 5 check character.
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Disable
DEFAULT
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Enable
Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Industrial
2 of 5 symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.
DEFAULT
Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length
Industrial 2 of 5 = Fixed Length
Product Reference Guide
185
Industrial 2 of 5
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 1 is
the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Length includes the barcode’s data characters only. The length can be set from 0 to 50
characters.
Table 12 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 302 if you want detailed
instructions on setting this feature.
Table 12. Industrial 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
1
Desired Setting
EXAMPLES
00 Characters
07 Characters
15 Characters
2
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3
Scan SELECT INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 LENGTH 1 SETTING
4
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
5
‘0’ and ‘0’
‘0’ and ‘7’
‘1’ and ‘5’
50 Characters
‘5’ AND ‘0’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the
entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
186
01 = Length 1 is 1 Character
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 2
Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 2 is
the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed
Length Mode. Length includes the barcode’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The
length does not include start/stop characters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only
one fixed length).
Table 13 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 303 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 13. Industrial 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
1
Desired Setting
EXAMPLES
00 (Ignore This
Length)
07 Characters
15 Characters
2
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3
Scan SELECT INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 SETTING
4
Scan Two Characters From
‘0’ and ‘0’
Appendix D, Keypad
5
‘0’ and ‘7’
‘1’ and ‘5’
50 Characters
‘5’ AND ‘0’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select Industrial 2 of5 Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the
entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
Product Reference Guide
50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters
187
Industrial 2 of 5
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an Industrial 2 of 5 label must
be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
DEFAULT
Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 1
Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 2
Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 3
Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 4
Industrial 2 of 5 Stitching
Enables/disables fixed length stitching for Industrial 2 of 5.
DEFAULT
Industrial 2 of 5 Stitching = Disable
Industrial 2 of 5 Stitching = Enable
188
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Industrial 2 of 5 Character Correlation
Industrial 2 of 5 Character Correlation
Enable/disables character correlation for Industrial 2 of 5.
DEFAULT
Industrial 2 of 5 Character Correlation = Disable
Industrial 2 of 5 Character Correlation = Enable
Product Reference Guide
189
Code IATA
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
CODE IATA
The following options apply to the IATA symbology.
IATA Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables the ability of the reader to decode IATA labels.
DEFAULT
IATA = Disable
IATA = Enable
IATA Check Character Transmission
Enables/Disables calculation and verification of an optional Industrial 2 of 5 check character.
IATA Check Character Transmission = Disable
DEFAULT
IATA Check Character Transmission = Enable
190
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Datalogic 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
DATALOGIC 2 OF 5
The following options apply to the Datalogic 2 of 5 symbology.
Datalogic 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Datalogic 2 of 5 barcodes.
DEFAULT
Datalogic 2 of 5 = Disable
Datalogic 2 of 5 = Enable
Datalogic 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
This option enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Datalogic 2 of 5 check
character.
DEFAULT
Datalogic 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable
Datalogic 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Enable
Product Reference Guide
191
Datalogic 2 of 5
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Datalogic 2 of 5 Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an Datalogic 2 of 5 label must
be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 1
DEFAULT
I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 2
I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 3
I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 4
Datalogic 2 of 5 Decoding Level
The Datalogic 2 of 5 Decoding Level feature is set using "2 of 5 Decoding
Level" on page 172.
192
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control
Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Datalogic
2 of 5 symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.
DEFAULT
Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length
Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control = Fixed Length
Product Reference Guide
193
Datalogic 2 of 5
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 1 is
the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. The length includes the barcode’s check and data characters. The length can be set from
2 to 50 characters in increments of two.
Table 14 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 302 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 14. Datalogic 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Setting
2 Characters
6 Characters
14 Characters
50 Characters
2
Pad with leading zeroes to
yield two digits
02
06
14
50
3
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4
Scan SELECT Datalogic 2 of 5 LENGTH 1 SETTING
5
6
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
‘0’ and ‘2’
‘0’ and ‘6’
‘1’ and ‘4’
‘5’ AND ‘0’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select Datalogic 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
194
06 = Length 1 is 6 Characters
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 2
Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 2 is
the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed
Length Mode. The length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
The length can be set from 2 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only
one fixed length).
Table 15 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 303 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 15. Datalogic 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Setting
Ignore This
Length
4 Characters
14 Characters
50 Characters
2
Pad with leading zeroes to
yield two digits
00
04
14
50
3
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4
Scan SELECT DATALOGIC 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 SETTING
5
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
6
‘0’ and ‘0’
‘0’ and ‘4’
‘1’ and ‘4’
‘5’ AND ‘0’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select Datalogic 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
Product Reference Guide
50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters
195
Datalogic 2 of 5
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Datalogic 2 of 5 Character Correlation
When correlation is enabled, the barcode reader will combine label data from multiple scans
when decoding. Enabling correlation will help the scanner read labels that have some spots and/
or voids. It may also help read labels that have damaged areas. Enabling correlation will also
increase the chances that a label will be read incorrectly.
DEFAULT
I 2 of 5 Character Correlation = Disable
I 2 of 5 Character Correlation = Enable
Datalogic 2 of 5 Stitching
This option enables/disables stitching for Datalogic 2 of 5 labels. When parts of a Datalogic 2 of
5 barcode are presented to the reader with this feature enabled, the barcode parts will be
assembled by the reader’s software, and the data will be decoded if all barcode proofing
requirements are met.
DEFAULT
Datalogic 2 of 5 Stitching = Disable
Datalogic 2 of 5 Stitching = Enable
196
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Codabar Enable/Disable
CODABAR
The following options apply to the Codabar symbology.
Codabar Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Codabar barcodes.
DEFAULT
Codabar = Disable
Codabar = Enable
Codabar Check Character Calculation
Enable this option to enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Codabar check
character. When disabled, any check character in the label is treated as a data character
DEFAULT
Codabar Check Character Calculation = Don’t Calculate
Codabar Check Character Calculation = Enable AIM standard
check char.
Codabar Check Character Calculation = Enable Modulo 10
check char.
Product Reference Guide
197
Codabar
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Codabar Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Codabar barcode data.
Codabar Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
DEFAULT
Codabar Check Character Transmission = Send
Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission
Enable this option to enable/disable transmission of Codabar start and stop characters.
Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission = Don’t Transmit
DEFAULT
Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission = Transmit
198
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Codabar Start/Stop Character Set
Codabar Start/Stop Character Set
This option specifies the format of transmitted Codabar start/stop characters.
Codabar Check Character Set = ABCD/TN*E
Codabar Check Character Set = ABCD/ABCD
Codabar Check Character Set = abcd/tn*e
DEFAULT
Codabar Check Character Set = abcd/abcd
Codabar Start/Stop Character Match
When enabled, this option requires that start and stop characters match.
DEFAULT
Codabar Start/Stop Character Match = Don’t Require Match
Codabar Start/Stop Character Match = Require Match
Product Reference Guide
199
Codabar
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Codabar Quiet Zones
Specifies the number of quiet zones for Codabar labels. Quiet zones are blank areas at the ends
of a barcode and are typically 10 times the width of the narrowest bar or space in the label.
Codabar Quiet Zones = Quiet Zone on one side
Codabar Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides
DEFAULT
Codabar Quiet Zones = Auto
Codabar Quiet Zones = Virtual Quiet Zones on two sides
Codabar Quiet Zones = Small Quiet Zones on two sides
200
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Codabar Minimum Reads
Codabar Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Codabar label must be
decoded before it is accepted as good read.
Codabar Minimum Reads = 1
DEFAULT
Codabar Minimum Reads = 2
Codabar Minimum Reads = 3
Codabar Minimum Reads = 4
Product Reference Guide
201
Codabar
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Codabar Decoding Level
Decoding Levels are used to configure a barcode symbology decoder to be very aggressive to
very conservative, depending on a particular customer’s needs. See page 302 for more
information on this feature.
Codabar Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative)
Codabar Decoding Level = 2
DEFAULT
Codabar Decoding Level = 3
Codabar Decoding Level = 4
Codabar Decoding Level = 5
202
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Codabar Length Control
Codabar Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Codabar
symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.
DEFAULT
Codabar Length Control = Variable Length
Codabar Length Control = Fixed Length
Product Reference Guide
203
Codabar
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Codabar Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Codabar Length Control. Length 1 is the
minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Length includes the barcode’s start, stop, check and data characters. The length must
include at least one data character. The length can be set from 3 to 50 characters.
Table 16 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 302 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 16. Codabar Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Setting (and pad with
leading zeroes)
03 Characters
09 Characters
15 Characters
2
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3
Scan SELECT CODABAR LENGTH 1 SETTING
4
5
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
‘0’ and ‘3’
‘0’ and ‘9’
‘1’ and ‘5’
50 Characters
‘5’ AND ‘0’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select Codabar Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
204
03 = Length 1 is 3 Characters
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Codabar Set Length 2
Codabar Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Codabar Length Control. Length 2 is the
maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. The length includes the barcode’s start, stop, check and data characters. The length must
include at least one data character.
The length can be set from 3 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only
one fixed length).
Table 17 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 303 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 17. Codabar Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Setting (and pad with
leading zeroes)
00 Ignore This
Length
07 Characters
15 Characters
2
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3
Scan SELECT CODABAR LENGTH 2 SETTING
4
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
5
‘0’ and ‘0’
‘0’ and ‘7’
‘1’ and ‘5’
50 Characters
‘5’ AND ‘0’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select Codabar Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
Product Reference Guide
50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters
205
Codabar
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Codabar Interdigit Ratio
This feature specifies the ratio between an intercharacter space and module for Codabar labels.
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = Disable
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 1
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 2
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 3
DEFAULT
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 4
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 5
206
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Codabar Interdigit Ratio
Codabar Interdigit Ratio — cont.
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 6
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 7
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 8
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 9
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 10
Product Reference Guide
207
Codabar
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Codabar Character Correlation
When correlation is enabled, the barcode reader will combine label data from multiple scans
when decoding. Enabling correlation will help the scanner read labels that have some spots and/
or voids. It may also help read labels that have damaged areas. Enabling correlation will also
increase the chances that a label will be read incorrectly.
DEFAULT
Codabar Character Correlation = Disable
Codabar Character Correlation = Enable
Codabar Stitching
This option enables/disables stitching for Codabar labels. When parts of a Codabar barcode are
presented to the reader with this feature enabled, the barcode parts will be assembled by the
reader’s software, and the data will be decoded if all barcode proofing requirements are met.
DEFAULT
Codabar Stitching = Disable
Codabar Stitching = Enable
208
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
ABC Codabar Enable/Disable
ABC CODABAR
The following options apply to the ABC Codabar symbology.
ABC Codabar Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode ABC Codabar labels.
DEFAULT
ABC Codabar = Disable
ABC Codabar = Enable
ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode
Specifies the concatenation mode between Static and Dynamic.
DEFAULT
ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode = Static
ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode = Dynamic
Product Reference Guide
209
ABC Codabar
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout
Specifies the timeout in 10-millisecond ticks used by the ABC Codabar Dynamic
Concatenation Mode.
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 50 msec
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 100 msec
DEFAULT
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 200 msec
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 500 msec
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 750 msec
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 1 Second
210
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
ABC Codabar Force Concatenation
ABC Codabar Force Concatenation
Forces labels starting or ending with D to be concatenated.
DEFAULT
ABC Codabar Force Concatenation = Disable
ABC Codabar Force Concatenation = Enable
Product Reference Guide
211
Code 11
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
CODE 11
The following options apply to the Code 11 symbology.
Code 11 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Code 11 barcodes.
DEFAULT
Code 11 = Disable
Code 11 = Enable
Code 11 Check Character Calculation
This option enables/disables calculation and verification of optional Code 11 check character.
Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Disable
Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Check C
Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Check K
DEFAULT
Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Check C and K
212
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 11 Check Character Transmission
Code 11 Check Character Transmission
This feature enables/disables transmission of an optional Code 11 check character.
Code 11 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
DEFAULT
Code 11 Check Character Transmission = Send
Code 11 Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Code 11 label must be
decoded before it is accepted as good read.
Code 11 Minimum Reads = 1
DEFAULT
Code 11 Minimum Reads = 2
Code 11 Minimum Reads = 3
Code 11 Minimum Reads = 4
Product Reference Guide
213
Code 11
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 11 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Code 11
symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.
DEFAULT
Code 11 Length Control = Variable Length
Code 11 Length Control = Fixed Length
214
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 11 Set Length 1
Code 11 Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Code 11 Length Control. Length 1 is the
minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters. The length can be set from 2 to
50 characters.
Table 18 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 302 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 18. Code 11 Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
1
Desired Setting (pad with
leading zeroes)
EXAMPLES
02 Characters
07 Characters
15 Characters
2
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3
Scan SELECT CODE 11 LENGTH 1 SETTING
4
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
5
‘0’ and ‘2’
‘0’ and ‘7’
‘1’ and ‘5’
50 Characters
‘5’ AND ‘0’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select Code 11 Set Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
Product Reference Guide
04 = Length 1 is 4 Characters
215
Code 11
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 11 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Code 11 Length Control. Length 2 is the
maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
The length can be set from 2 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only
one fixed length).
Table 19 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 303 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 19. Code 11 Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
1
Desired Setting (pad with
leading zeroes)
EXAMPLES
00 (Ignore This
Length)
07 Characters
15 Characters
2
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3
Scan SELECT CODE 11 LENGTH 2 SETTING
4
5
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
‘0’ and ‘0’
‘0’ and ‘7’
‘0’ and ‘F’
50 Characters
‘3’ AND 2’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select Code 11 Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
216
50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio
This feature specifies the ratio between an intercharacter space and module for Code 11 labels.
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = Disable
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 1
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 2
Code11 Interdigit Ratio = 3
DEFAULT
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 4
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 5
Product Reference Guide
217
Code 11
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio — cont.
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 6
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 7
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 8
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 9
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 10
218
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 11 Decoding Level
Code 11 Decoding Level
Decoding Levels are used to configure a barcode symbology decoder to be very aggressive to
very conservative depending on a particular customer’s needs. See page 302 for more
information on this feature.
Codabar Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative)
Codabar Decoding Level = 2
DEFAULT
Codabar Decoding Level = 3
Codabar Decoding Level = 4
Codabar Decoding Level = 5 (Aggressive)
Product Reference Guide
219
Code 11
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 11 Character Correlation
When correlation is enabled, the barcode reader will combine label data from multiple scans
when decoding. Enabling correlation will help the scanner read labels that have some spots and/
or voids. It may also help read labels that have damaged areas. Enabling correlation will also
increase the chances that a label will be read incorrectly.
DEFAULT
Code 11 Character Correlation = Disable
Code 11 Character Correlation = Enable
Code 11 Stitching
This option enables/disables stitching for Code 11 labels. When parts of a Code 11 barcode are
presented to the reader with this feature enabled, the barcode parts will be assembled by the
reader’s software, and the data will be decoded if all barcode proofing requirements are met.
DEFAULT
Code 11 Stitching = Disable
Code 11 Stitching = Enable
220
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Enable/Disable
GS1 DATABAR™ OMNIDIRECTIONAL
The following options apply to the GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional (formerly RSS-14)
symbology.
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional barcodes.
DEFAULT
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional = Disable
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional = Enable
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation
When enabled, GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional barcodes will be translated to the GS1-128
label data format.
DEFAULT
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation = Disable
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation = Enable
Product Reference Guide
221
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a GS1 DataBar™
Omnidirectional label must be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
DEFAULT
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Minimum Reads = 1
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Minimum Reads = 2
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Minimum Reads = 3
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Minimum Reads = 4
222
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Enable/Disable
GS1 DATABAR™ EXPANDED
The following options apply to the GS1 DataBar™ Expanded (formerly RSS Expanded)
symbology.
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read GS1 DataBar™ Expanded barcodes.
DEFAULT
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded = Disable
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded = Enable
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation
When enabled, GS1 DataBar™ Expanded barcodes will be translated to the GS1-128 label
data format.
DEFAULT
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation = Disable
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation = Enable
Product Reference Guide
223
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a GS1 DataBar™ Expanded
label must be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
DEFAULT
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Minimum Reads = 1
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Minimum Reads = 2
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Minimum Reads = 3
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Minimum Reads = 4
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the GS1
DataBar™ Expanded symbology.
Variable Length. For variable-length decoding, a minimum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed-length decoding, two different lengths may be set.
DEFAULT
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control = Variable Length
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control = Fixed Length
224
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 1
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control.
Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in
Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode’s data characters only. The length can be set
from 1 to 74 characters.
Table 20 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 302 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 20. GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Setting
01 Character
07 Characters
52 Characters
2
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3
Scan SELECT GS1 DataBar™ EXPANDED LENGTH 1SETTING
4
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
5
‘0’ and ‘1’
‘0’ and ‘7’
‘5’ and ‘2’
74 Characters
‘7’ AND ‘4’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
Product Reference Guide
01 = Length 1 is 1 Character
225
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control.
Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if
in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode’s data characters only. The length can be set
from 1 to 74 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).
Table 21 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 303 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 21. GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Setting
00 (ignore second
length)
07 Characters
52 Characters
2
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3
Scan SELECT GS1 DataBar™ EXPANDED LENGTH 2 SETTING
4
5
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
‘0’ and ‘0’
‘0’ and ‘7’
‘5’ and ‘2’
74 Characters
‘7’ and ‘4’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
226
74 = Length 2 is 74 Characters
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
GS1 DataBar™ Limited Enable/Disable
GS1 DATABAR™ LIMITED
The following options apply to the GS1 DataBar™ Limited (formerly RSS Limited)
symbology.
GS1 DataBar™ Limited Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read GS1 DataBar™ Limited barcodes.
DEFAULT
GS1 DataBar™ Limited = Disable
GS1 DataBar™ Limited = Enable
GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation
When enabled, GS1 DataBar™ Limited barcodes will be translated to the GS1-128 label data
format.
DEFAULT
GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation = Disable
GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation = Enable
Product Reference Guide
227
GS1 DataBar™ Limited
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
GS1 DataBar™ Limited Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a GS1 DataBar™ Limited
label must be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
DEFAULT
GS1 DataBar™ Limited Minimum Reads = 1
GS1 DataBar™ Limited Minimum Reads = 2
GS1 DataBar™ Limited Minimum Reads = 3
GS1 DataBar™ Limited Minimum Reads = 4
228
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 93 Enable/Disable
CODE 93
The following options apply to the Code 93 symbology.
Code 93 Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Code 93 labels.
DEFAULT
Code 93 = Disable
Code 93 = Enable
Code 93 Check Character Calculation
Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Code 93 check character.
Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Disable
Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Enable Check C
Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Enable Check K
DEFAULT
Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Enable Check C and K
Product Reference Guide
229
Code 93
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 93 Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an optional Code 93 check character.
DEFAULT
Code 93 Check Character Transmission = Disable
Code 93 Check Character Transmission = Enable
Code 93 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Code 93
symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.
DEFAULT
Code 93 Length Control = Variable Length
Code 93 = Fixed Length
230
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 93 Set Length 1
Code 93 Set Length 1
Specifies one of the barcode lengths for Code 93 Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label
length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length
includes the barcode’s data characters only. The length can be set from 01 to 50 characters.
Table 22 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 302 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 22. Code 93 Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
1
Desired Setting
EXAMPLES
01 Characters
07 Characters
15 Characters
2
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3
Scan SELECT CODE 93 LENGTH 1 SETTING
4
Scan Two Characters From
‘0’ and ‘1’
Appendix D, Keypad
5
‘0’ and ‘7’
‘1’ and ‘5’
50 Characters
‘5’ AND ‘0’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select Code 93 Set Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the
entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
Product Reference Guide
01 = Length 1 is 1 Character
231
Code 93
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 93 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Code 93 Length Control. Length 2 is the
maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Length includes the barcode’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length
does not include start/stop characters. The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of
0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).
Table 23 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 303 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 23. CODE 93 Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
1
Desired Setting
EXAMPLES
00 (Ignore This
Length)
07 Characters
15 Characters
2
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3
Scan SELECT CODE 93 LENGTH 2 SETTING
4
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
5
‘0’ and ‘0’
‘0’ and ‘7’
‘1’ and ‘5’
50 Characters
‘5’ AND ‘0’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select Code 93 Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the
entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
232
50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 93 Minimum Reads
Code 93 Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Code 93 label must be
decoded before it is accepted as good read.
DEFAULT
Code 93 Minimum Reads = 1
Code 93 Minimum Reads = 2
Code 93 Minimum Reads = 3
Code 93 Minimum Reads = 4
Product Reference Guide
233
Code 93
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 93 Decoding Level
Specifies the decoding level for Code 93. Decoding Levels are used to configure a barcode
symbology decoder to be very aggressive to very conservative depending on a particular
customer’s needs. See page 302 for more information on this feature.
Code 93 Decoding Level = Disable
Code 93 Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative)
Code 93 Decoding Level = 2
DEFAULT
Code 93 Decoding Level = 3
Code 93 Decoding Level = 4
Code 93 Decoding Level = 5 (Aggressive)
234
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 93 Quiet Zones
Code 93 Quiet Zones
Enables/disables quiet zones for Code 93.
Code 93 Quiet Zones = No Quiet Zones
Code 93 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zone on one side
Code 93 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides
DEFAULT
Code 93 Quiet Zones = Auto
Code 93 Quiet Zones = Virtual Quiet Zones on two sides
Product Reference Guide
235
Code 93
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 93 Stitching
Disable/enable fixed or variable length stitching for Code 93.
Code 93 Stitching = Disable
DEFAULT
Code 93 Stitching = Enable
Code 93 Character Correlation
Enables/disables Character Correlation for Code 93.
DEFAULT
Code 93 Character Correlation = Disable
Code 93 Character Correlation = Enable
236
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
MSI Enable/Disable
MSI
The following options apply to the MSI symbology.
MSI Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode MSI labels.
DEFAULT
MSI = Disable
MSI = Enable
MSI Check Character Calculation
Enables/Disables calculation and verification of an optional MSI check character.
MSI Check Character Calculation = Disable
DEFAULT
MSI Check Character Calculation = Enable Mod10
MSI Check Character Calculation = Enable Mod11/10
MSI Check Character Calculation = Enable Mod10/10
Product Reference Guide
237
MSI
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
MSI Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an MSI check character.
MSI Check Character Transmission = Disable
DEFAULT
MSI Check Character Transmission = Enable
MSI Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the
MSI symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be
set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.
DEFAULT
MSI Length Control = Variable Length
MSI = Fixed Length
238
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
MSI Set Length 1
MSI Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for MSI Length Control. Length 1 is the
minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Length includes the barcode’s data characters only. The length can be set from 01
to 50 characters.
Table 24 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 302 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 24. MSI Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
1
Desired Setting
EXAMPLES
01 Characters
07 Characters
15 Characters
2
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3
Scan SELECT MSI LENGTH 1 SETTING
4
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
5
‘0’ and ‘1’
‘0’ and ‘7’
‘1’ and ‘5’
50 Characters
‘5’ AND ‘0’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select MSI Set Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the
entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
Product Reference Guide
01 = Length 1 is 1 Character
239
MSI
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
MSI Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for MSI Length Control. Length 2 is the
maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed
Length Mode. Length includes the barcode’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters.
The length does not include start/stop characters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length
(only one fixed length).
Table 25 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 303 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 25. MSI Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
1
Desired Setting
EXAMPLES
00 (Ignore This
Length)
07 Characters
15 Characters
2
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3
Scan SELECT MSI LENGTH 2 SETTING
4
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
5
‘0’ and ‘0’
‘0’ and ‘7’
‘1’ and ‘5’
50 Characters
‘5’ AND ‘0’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select MSI Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the
entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
240
50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
MSI Minimum Reads
MSI Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an MSI label must be
decoded before it is accepted as good read.
MSI Minimum Reads = 1
MSI Minimum Reads = 2
MSI Minimum Reads = 3
DEFAULT
MSI Minimum Reads = 4
Product Reference Guide
241
MSI
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
MSI Decoding Level
Specifies the decoding level for MSI. Decoding Levels are used to configure a barcode
symbology decoder to be very aggressive to very conservative depending on a particular
customer’s needs. See page 302 for more information on this feature.
MSI Decoding Level = Disable
MSI Decoding Level = 1 (conservative)
MSI Decoding Level = 2
DEFAULT
MSI Decoding Level = 3
MSI Decoding Level = 4
MSI Decoding Level = 5 (aggressive)
242
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Plessey Enable/Disable
PLESSEY
The following options apply to the Plessey symbology.
Plessey Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Plessey labels.
DEFAULT
Plessey = Disable
Plessey = Enable
Product Reference Guide
243
Plessey
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Plessey Check Character Calculation
Enables/Disables calculation and verification of an optional Plessey check character.
Plessey Check Character Calculation = Disable
DEFAULT
Plessey Check Character Calculation =
Enable Plessey std. check char. verification
Plessey Check Character Calculation =
Enable Anker check char. verification
Plessey Check Character Calculation =
Enable Plessey std. and Anker check char verification
Plessey Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an MSI check character.
Plessey Check Character Transmission = Disable
DEFAULT
Plessey Check Character Transmission = Enable
244
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Plessey Length Control
Plessey Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Plessey
symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.
DEFAULT
Plessey Length Control = Variable Length
Plessey = Fixed Length
Product Reference Guide
245
Plessey
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Plessey Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Plessey Length Control. Length 1 is the
minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Length includes the barcode’s data characters only. The length can be set from 01 to 50
characters.
Table 26 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 302 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 26. Plessey Length 1 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
1
Desired Setting
EXAMPLES
01 Characters
07 Characters
15 Characters
2
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3
Scan SELECT Plessey LENGTH 1 SETTING
4
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
5
‘0’ and ‘1’
‘0’ and ‘7’
‘1’ and ‘5’
50 Characters
‘5’ AND ‘0’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select Plessey Set Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the
entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
246
01 = Length 1 is 1 Character
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Plessey Set Length 2
Plessey Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Plessey Length Control. Length 2 is the
maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length
Mode. Length includes the barcode’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length
does not include start/stop characters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only
one fixed length).
Table 27 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 303 for detailed instructions on
setting this feature.
Table 27. Plessey Length 2 Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
1
Desired Setting
EXAMPLES
00 (Ignore This
Length)
07 Characters
15 Characters
2
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3
Scan SELECT PLESSEY LENGTH 2 SETTING
4
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
5
‘0’ and ‘0’
‘0’ and ‘7’
‘1’ and ‘5’
50 Characters
‘5’ AND ‘0’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Select Plessey Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the
entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
Product Reference Guide
50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters
247
Plessey
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Plessey Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Plessey label must be
decoded before it is accepted as good read.
Plessey Minimum Reads = 1
Plessey Minimum Reads = 2
Plessey Minimum Reads = 3
DEFAULT
Plessey Minimum Reads = 4
248
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Plessey Decoding Level
Plessey Decoding Level
Specifies the decoding level for Plessey. Decoding Levels are used to configure a barcode
symbology decoder to be very aggressive to very conservative depending on a particular
customer’s needs. See page 302 for more information on this feature.
Plessey Decoding Level = Disable
Plessey Decoding Level = 1 (conservative)
Plessey Decoding Level = 2
DEFAULT
Plessey Decoding Level = 3
Plessey Decoding Level = 4
Plessey Decoding Level = 5 (aggressive)
Product Reference Guide
249
Plessey
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Plessey Stitching
Enables/disables fixed length stitching for Plessey.
DEFAULT
Plessey Stitching = Disable
Plessey Stitching = Enable
Plessey Character Correlation
Enables/disables Character Correlation for Plessey.
DEFAULT
Plessey Character Correlation = Disable
Plessey Character Correlation = Enable
250
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 4 Enable/Disable
CODE 4
The following options apply to the Code 4 symbology.
Code 4 Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of imager to decode Code 4 labels.
DEFAULT
Code 4 = Disable
Code 4 = Enable
Code 4 Check Character Transmission
This feature enables/disables transmission of an optional Code 4 check character.
Code 4 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
DEFAULT
Code 4 Check Character Transmission = Send
Product Reference Guide
251
Code 5
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 4 Hex to Decimal Conversion
This feature enables/disables the conversion of hexidecimal label data to decimal label data.
Code 4 Hex to Decimal Conversion = Disable
DEFAULT
Code 4 Hex to Decimal Conversion = Enable
CODE 5
The following options apply to the Code 5 symbology.
Code 5 Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of imager to decode Code 5 labels.
DEFAULT
Code 5 = Disable
Code 5 = Enable
252
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 5 Check Character Transmission
Code 5 Check Character Transmission
This feature enables/disables transmission of an optional Code 5 check character.
Code 5 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
DEFAULT
Code 5 Check Character Transmission = Send
Code 5 Hex to Decimal Conversion
This feature enables/disables the conversion of hexidecimal label data to decimal label data.
Code 5 Hex to Decimal Conversion = Disable
DEFAULT
Code 5 Hex to Decimal Conversion = Enable
Product Reference Guide
253
Code 4 and Code 5 Common Configuration Items
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
CODE 4 AND CODE 5 COMMON CONFIGURATION ITEMS
The following options apply to both Code 4 and Code 5 symbologies.
Code 4 and 5 Decoding Level
Decoding Levels are used to configure a barcode symbology decoder to be very aggressive to very
conservative depending on a particular customer’s needs. See page 291 for more information on
this feature.
This configuration item applies to Code 4 and Code 5.
Code 4 and Code 5 Decoding Level = 1 (conservative)
Code 4 and Code 5 Decoding Level = 2
DEFAULT
Code 4 and Code 5 Decoding Level = 3
Code 4 and Code 5 Decoding Level = 4
Code 4 and Code 5 Decoding Level = 5 (aggressive)
254
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 4 and Code 5 Minimum Reads
Code 4 and Code 5 Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Code 4 or Code 5 label must
be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
DEFAULT
Code 4 or Code 5 Minimum Reads = 1
Code 4 or Code 5 Minimum Reads = 2
Code 4 or Code 5 Minimum Reads = 3
Code 4 or Code 5 Minimum Reads = 4
Product Reference Guide
255
Code 4 and Code 5 Common Configuration Items
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
NOTES
256
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Chapter 4
Wireless Features
The features in this section are valid only for the GM4100 and GBT4100
models.
This section provides options and programming related to the reader’s STAR and Bluetooth
communication features. Reference Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of standard factory
settings.
WIRELESS BEEPER FEATURES starting on page 259
• Good Transmission Beep
• Disconnect Beep
• Beep Frequency
• Base Station Beep
• Beep Duration
• Leash Alarm
• Beep Volume
•
CONFIGURATION UPDATES starting on page 264
• Automatic Configuration Update
• Automatic Flash Update
• Copy Configuration to Scanner
• Request Flash Update
• Copy Configuration to Base Station
•
POWERDOWN TIMEOUT starting on page 266
BATCH FEATURES starting on page 268
• Batch Mode
• Erase Batch Memory
• Send Batch
• RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay
DIRECT RADIO AUTOLINK starting on page 270
RF ADDRESS STAMPING starting on page 270
• Source Radio Address Transmission
Product Reference Guide
• Source Radio Address Delimiter Character
257
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
FEATURES FOR STAR MODELS ONLY starting on page 272
•
STAR Radio Protocol Timeout
•
STAR Radio Transmit Mode
DISPLAY FEATURES starting on page 274
•
Contrast
•
Display Mode
•
Font Size
•
Display Timeout
•
Backlight
•
Keypad Select
BLUETOOTH-ONLY FEATURES starting on page 279
BT SECURITY FEATURES
•
BT Security Mode
•
Select PIN Code Length
•
BT Pin Code
•
Set PIN Code
BT HID Send Unkown ASCII Char
BT HID FEATURES
•
BT HID Variable PIN Code
•
•
BT HID ALT Mode
•
OTHER BT FEATURES
•
BT Poll Rate
•
258
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Good Transmission Beep
WIRELESS BEEPER FEATURES
Several options are available to configure beeper behavior for RF operation.
Good Transmission Beep
Enables/disables the Good Transmission Beep indication. When enabled, a beep occurs when a
Label is correctly transmitted to the base.
Good Transmission Beep = Disable
DEFAULT
Good Transmission Beep = Enable
Beep Frequency
Adjusts radio-specific beep indications to sound at a low, medium or high frequency, selectable
from the list below. (Controls the beeper’s pitch/tone.)
DEFAULT
Beep Frequency = Low
Beep Frequency = Medium
Beep Frequency = High
Product Reference Guide
259
Wireless Beeper Features
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Beep Duration
This feature controls the duration of radio-specific beep indications.
Beep Duration = 60 msec
Beep Duration = 80 msec
DEFAULT
Beep Duration = 100 msec
Beep Duration = 120 msec
Beep Duration = 140 msec
Beep Duration = 160 msec
Beep Duration = 180 msec
Beep Duration = 200 msec
260
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Beep Volume
Beep Volume
Selects the beeper volume (loudness) of radio-specific beep indications. There are three
selectable volume levels.
Beep Volume = Low
Beep Volume = Medium
DEFAULT
Beep Volume = High
Disconnect Beep
Enables/disables the beep indication that a handheld has become connected or disconnected
from a Base Station.
The defaults are different for the STAR and BT models.
DEFAULT
GM 4100 STAR default
Disconnect Beep = Disable
DEFAULT
Disconnect Beep = Enable
BT default
Product Reference Guide
261
Wireless Beeper Features
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Base Station Beep
Enables/disables a beep indication when the handheld is placed in the Base Station.
BT Base Station Beep = Disable
DEFAULT
BT Base Station Beep = Enable
Leash Alarm
This setting specifies the number of seconds to sound the Leash Mode beeps (three per second)
when the handheld goes out of range. This is especially useful in instances where the reader
might inadvertently have been placed in a bag or cart.
For this mode to be effective, reader must be linked to the Base Station and Sleep Mode Timeout
on page 94 must be disabled. If the reader is asleep or disconnected from the Base Station, there
is no way for it to know where it is relative to the Base Station because communication is not
active between the devices.
DEFAULT
Leash Alarm = Disabled
Leash Alarm = 1 Second
Leash Alarm = 2 Seconds
262
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Leash Alarm
Leash Alarm — cont.
Leash Alarm = 3 Seconds
Leash Alarm = 4 Seconds
Leash Alarm = 5 Seconds
Leash Alarm = 10 Seconds
Leash Alarm = 25 Seconds
Leash Alarm = 30 Seconds
Product Reference Guide
263
Configuration Updates
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
CONFIGURATION UPDATES
See page 318 in “References” for detailed information and examples of these features.
Automatic Configuration Update
When this feature is enabled, a reader and its linked Base Station can automatically ensure they
stay in sync with regard to application hardware and/or configuration. See page 318 for more information on this feature.
Automatic Configuration Update = Disable
DEFAULT
Automatic Configuration Update = Enable
Copy Configuration to Scanner
Scan the following label to copy the current Base Station configuration to the scanner. Use this
method when the Auto Configuration Update feature is disabled and you want a one-time configuration update to be performed on the scanner.
Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunction
with this barcode.
Copy Configuration to Scanner
264
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Copy Configuration to Base Station
Copy Configuration to Base Station
Scan the following label to copy the current scanner configuration to the Base Station. Use this
method when the Auto Configuration Update feature is disabled and you want a one-time
configuration update to be performed on the Base Station.
Copy Configuration to Base Station
Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label with this barcode.
Automatic Flash Update
This feature enables/disables the automatic flash update of a reader.
This item is valid only with POS version of Base Station (model 4010).
DEFAULT
Automatic Flash Update = Disable
Automatic Flash Update = Enable
Product Reference Guide
265
Configuration Updates
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Request Flash Update
Scan this barcode to request a flash update from a Base Station
Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunction
with this barcode.
NOTE
Request Flash Update
Powerdown Timeout
The Powerdown Timeout feature sets the time for automatically switching the unit off when
the imager has been idle.
Powerdown Timeout = Disable
Powerdown Timeout = 10 minutes
Powerdown Timeout = 20 minutes
DEFAULT
Powerdown Timeout = 30 minutes
266
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Powerdown Timeout
Powerdown Timeout — continued
Powerdown Timeout = 60 Minutes (1 Hour)
Powerdown Timeout = 120 Minutes (2 Hours)
Powerdown Timeout = 4 Hours
Powerdown Timeout = 6 Hours
Powerdown Timeout = 8 Hours
Powerdown Timeout = 16 Hours
Powerdown Timeout = 24 Hours
Product Reference Guide
267
Batch Features
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
BATCH FEATURES
Batch Mode
This option specifies whether to store labels in the handheld while disconnected from the base.
Options are as follows:
• Disabled — The handheld will not store/batch labels.
•
•
Automatic — The handheld will store labels to RAM when the handheld goes out of
range and is disconnected from the remote device.
Manual — The handheld will always store labels to Flash memory. The user must manually send the stored labels to the remote device using a special "batch send" label.
DEFAULT
Batch Mode = Disabled
Batch Mode = Automatic
Batch Mode = Manual
Send Batch
Use this barcode to initiate sending of labels stored in batch memory.
Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunction
with this barcode.
Send Batch
268
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Erase Batch Memory
Erase Batch Memory
Use this barcode to erase any labels stored in batch memory.
Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunction
with this barcode.
Erase Batch Memory
RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay
Specifies the delay in 10 msec increments between transmitting labels stored in batch memory .
DEFAULT
RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = No Delay
RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 50 mS
RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 100 mS
RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 0.5 seconds
RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 1 second
RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 2.5 seconds
Product Reference Guide
269
Direct Radio AutoLink
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
DIRECT RADIO AUTOLINK
This feature enables/disables the ability to link a wireless handheld to a base station without
scanning the Unlink label first.
DEFAULT
Direct Radio Link = Unlink Label Required
Direct Radio Link = Automatic Unlinking
RF ADDRESS STAMPING
These features allow configuration of source radio data inclusion.
Source Radio Address Transmission
Enables/disables the ability of source radio address information to be transmitted to the host
and, if so, at what position with respect to the label data. See page 318 in “References” for
detailed information and examples for setting this feature.
When included as a prefix, the source-radio ID is displayed after all label
formatting has been applied. The 6 byte hex address is sent as 12 ascii characters, i.e., an address of 00 06 66 00 1A ED will be sent as (shown in hex):
30 30 30 36 36 36 30 30 31 41 45 44
DEFAULT
Source Radio Address Transmission = Do Not Include
Source Radio Address Transmission = Prefix
270
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Source Radio Address Delimiter Character
Source Radio Address Delimiter Character
This option specifies the delimiter character to be placed between the label data and radio
address when address stamping is enabled.
This feature only applies if "Source Radio Address Transmission" on
page 270 is enabled.
Set Source Radio Address Delimiter Character
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
Product Reference Guide
00 = No Delimiter Character
271
RF Address Stamping
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Features for Star Models Only
The features in this section are valid only for the Gryphon I GM4100 Star model:
• STAR Radio Protocol Timeout
• STAR Radio Transmit Mode
DISPLAY FEATURES starting on page 274
•
•
•
•
•
•
Contrast
Font Size
Backlight
Display Mode
Display Timeout
Keypad Select
STAR Radio Protocol Timeout
This parameter sets the valid wait time before transmission between the handheld reader and
Base Station is considered failed.
When setting this parameter, take into consideration the radio traffic (number of readers in the
same area). The selectable range for this feature is from 02 to 25 seconds. See page 320 in
“References” for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.
Set Radio Protocol Timeout
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
272
02 = 2 Seconds Radio Protocol Timeout
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
STAR Radio Transmit Mode
STAR Radio Transmit Mode
Specifies the transmission protocol for Star communications.
Options are:
• ACK from cradle to scanner — signals a good transmission as soon as the Base Station
receives a label
• ACK when sent to host — scanner signals a good transmission as soon as the Base Station
has sent the label to the host
• ACK from host — scanner signals a good transmission as soon as the Base Station has sent
the label to the host and host has replied with an acknowledge message.
DEFAULT
$ from cradle
ACK
ACK when sent to host
ACK from host
ACK from host works only for RS232 or USB-COM interfaces with ACK/
NACK disabled. If ACK from host is configured with any other interface
conditions, it works like ACK when sent to host.
See "Message Formatting" on page 323 for details.
Product Reference Guide
273
Display Features
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
DISPLAY FEATURES
Contrast
Read the code until the desired contrast is reached.
Lighter
Darker
Font Size
DEFAULT
Font size = Small
Font$ size = Medium
Font
$ size = Large
274
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Backlight
Backlight
DEFAULT
Display$backlight = off
Display
$ backlight = on
Display Mode
The user can control the reader display behavior according to various selections. See page 318 in
“References” for detailed information about each feature.
DEFAULT
Local
$ Echo mode
Normal mode
Clear display after decode
Product Reference Guide
275
Display Features
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Display Timeout
Specifies how long the display will remain on after a display write. Display is forced on after any
display write or after any reading phase. Display and backlight are turned off after this timeout
expires.
Display $
Timeout = Disable
Display Timeout = 1 Second
Display Timeout
= 2 Seconds
$
Display Timeout = 3 Seconds
Display Timeout = 4 Seconds
276
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Display Timeout
Display Timeout - cont.
$
Display Timeout
= 5 Seconds
Display Timeout= 6 Seconds
Display Timeout = 7 Seconds
DEFAULT
Display Timeout = 8 Seconds
Display Timeout = 9 Seconds
Display Timeout$= 9.9 Seconds (9,900ms max.)
Product Reference Guide
277
Display Features
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Keypad Select
This parameter specifies the character that has to be sent from the scanner when one of the three
keys are pressed. For example, when key1 is pressed a 0x3C '<' character is sent.
Follow these instructions to set this feature:
1. Determine the desired setting.
2. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming
Mode.
3. Scan the barcode: DISPLAY KEYPAD SELECT.
4. Then read 3 HEX characters in the range 01-FE from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad,
corresponding to the right, center and left keys respectively.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming Mode.
Disable Keypad
$
Enable Keypad
Select
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
DEFAULT
278
3C3D3E
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Keypad Select
Bluetooth-Only Features
The features in this section are valid only for Gryphon Bluetooth models. Also reference the
Setup section for instructions on Linking a BT Reader to a PC, starting on page 26.
Please update the list as below:
BT SECURITY FEATURES
•
•
BT Security Mode
BT Pin Code
•Select PIN Code Length
•Set PIN Code
BT HID FEATURES
•
•
•
BT HID Variable PIN Code
BT HID ALT Mode
BT HID Send Unkown ASCII Char
OTHER BT FEATURES
•
BT Poll Rate
Product Reference Guide
279
BT Security Features
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
BT SECURITY FEATURES
The BT system can be set up to require a configurable PIN code to authenticate/connect BT
devices, and encrypt the data. This can be done in one of two ways:
• The scanner can be programmed with a PIN code using the bar codes in this section.
• The Host can be set up to specify a custom security PIN code when a scanner attempts to
connect. For more information about this feature, contact Datalogic Technical Support.
The Gryphon GBT4100 can be set up to require a PIN code when connecting to
the host. If you are adding new equipment to a system that uses a custom
security PIN, please read this section for information before proceeding.
Follow these steps to set the PIN code for a scanner:
1. Enable BT Security Mode by scanning the "Enable” bar code below.
2. Select a PIN code length of either 4 or 16 characters by scanning the appropriate bar code
in "Select PIN Code Length" on page 281.
3. Scan the relevant bar code from "Set PIN Code" on page 281, then scan the desired alphanumeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad to set the PIN code.
See "BT-Only Features" on page 321 in "References” for more detailed information and examples
for this feature.
BT Security Mode
This feature enables/disables authentication and encryption of the BT link. Use the feature "BT
Pin Code" on page 281 to specify the pin code used to authenticate the BT Link.
NOTE
Changing the security mode setting will unlink the devices. If the Automatic
Configuration Update is set to the default enabled setting, the devices must
only be relinked. If the Automatic Configuration Update is set to the disabled
setting, the Security Mode setting must also be updated in the Base Station
using Aladdin. After the Base Station has been updated the devices must be
relinked.
DEFAULT
BT Security Mode = Disable
BT Security Mode = Enable
280
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
BT Pin Code
BT Pin Code
After enabling Security Mode (see "BT Security Mode on page 280), specify whether you want to
set a 4-digit or a 16-digit PIN Code. See page 321 for detailed information and examples for
setting this feature.
Select PIN Code Length
DEFAULT
Select 4-character BT PIN Code
Select 16-character BT PIN Code
Set PIN Code
Determine the desired characters for the PIN code, then convert to hexadecimal using the
ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual. See page 321 for detailed information and
examples for setting this feature.
DEFAULT
Set 4-character BT Pin Code
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING
MODE bar code above, then the desired bar code , followed by
the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D.
Keypad representing your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.
Set 16-character BT PIN Code
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not
save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
CANCEL
Product Reference Guide
281
BT HID Features
BT HID FEATURES
BT HID Variable PIN Code
This feature specifies the selection available for Static or Variable Pin Code, when BT HID
profile is configured.
DEFAULT
Use Static PIN Code
Use Variable PIN Code
BT HID ALT Mode
This feature Enables/Disables the ability to transmit correctly a label content to the host
regardless of the BT HID Country Mode selected, when BT HID profile is configured.
DEFAULT
HID ALT Mode = Disable
HID ALT Mode = Enable
282
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
BT HID Send Unkown
BT HID Send Unkown ASCII Char
This feature Enable/Disable the ability of a BT HH to transmit a label containing an unknown
character to the host, when BT HID profile is configured.
DEFAULT
HID Send Unkown ASCII Char = Disable
HID Send Unkown ASCII Char = Enable
Product Reference Guide
283
Other BT Features
OTHER BT FEATURES
BT Poll Rate
This feature specifies the time between BT polls.
BT Poll Rate = Maximum BT Poll Rate
BT Poll Rate = 10 ms
DEFAULT
BT Poll Rate = 20 ms
BT Poll Rate = 30 ms
BT Poll Rate = 50 ms
BT Poll Rate = 100 ms
284
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
BT Poll Rate
BT Poll Rate (continued)
BT Poll Rate = 150 ms
BT Poll Rate = 200 ms
BT Poll Rate = 500 ms
BT Poll Rate = 990 ms
Product Reference Guide
285
Other BT Features
NOTES
286
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Chapter 5
Laser Features
The features in this section are valid for the Gryphon L GD4300 model only.
LASER SCAN ANGLE on page 288
LASER IDLE MODE on page 288
BI-DIRECTIONAL READ DECODING on page 289
ALWAYS ON SCAN MODE TIMEOUT on page 290
This section provides options and programming related to the reader’s laser features.
Reference Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of standard factory settings.
For hands-free or stand operations, it is recommended that Flashing scan
mode be used. See "Scan Mode" on page 101 for programming labels for
this feature. For more information, go to page 314 in “References”.
Product Reference Guide
287
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Laser Scan Angle
This feature sets the scan angle for the laser. The Narrow scan angle is helpful for selecting and
reading a specific barcode among a tight grouping of labels.
DEFAULT
Laser Scan Angle = Normal (47 degrees)
Laser Scan Angle = Narrow (35 degrees)
Laser Idle Mode
Laser Idle Mode option is applicable for; trigger Single, Trigger Hold Multiple & Trigger Pulse
Multiple only.
This configuration provides control over the laser scanning motor when the laser is not actively
scanning. The options are:
Dither Disable . Shuts down the motor (laser mirror dithering) during laser engine idle time to
reduce overall scanner power consumption.
Dither Enable. Allows the laser engine motor to continue dithering when laser is not active;
may provide an improved read response time.
DEFAULT
Dither Disable
Dither Enable
288
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Bi-Directional Read Decoding
Bi-Directional Read Decoding
This configuration provides control over the good read and barcode label requirement. This
programming option for Gyphon Laser affects all barcode symbologies.
Bi-Directional Read Disable. When Bi-directional reading is disabled, the laser scan is only
required to obtain a valid label read in one scanning direction.
Bi-Directional Read Enable. When enabled, the reader is must obtain a valid good read in both
scanning directions as part of the label read/decode process. Enabled will provides increased
decode reliability.
Bi-Directional Read Disable
DEFAULT
Bi-Directional Read Enable
Product Reference Guide
289
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Always On Scan Mode Timeout
When the Gryphon Laser is in Always On scanning mode, timeout periods can be configured.
If the programmed Always On Timeout elapses, the reader will shut down and a trigger pull is
required to resume operation.
Always On Timeout: 1 Hour
Always On Timeout: 2 Hours
Always On Timeout: 3 Hours
Always On Timeout: 4 Hours
DEFAULT
Always On Timeout: 5 Hours
290
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Chapter 6
References
This section contains explanations and examples of selected barcode features. See the
Configuration section for the actual barcode labels used to configure the reader.
RS-232 Parameters
RS-232 Only
Baud Rate
Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Set the reader's baud rate to
match the baud rate setting of the host device. With an improper baud rate setting, data may
not reach the host correctly.
Stop Bits
The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one
character and prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream. The
number of stop bits selected (one or two) depends on the number the receiving terminal is
programmed to accommodate. Set the number of stop bits to match host device requirements.
Parity
This feature specifies parity required for sending and receiving data. A parity check bit is the
most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Select the parity type according to host
device requirements.
• Select None when no parity bit is required.
• Select Odd parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an
odd number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character.
• Select Even parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an
even number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character.
Handshaking Control
The data interface consists of an RS-232 port designed to operate either with or without the
hardware handshaking lines, Request to Send (RTS), and Clear to Send (CTS). Handshaking
Control includes the following options:
• RTS — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS is ignored.
• RTS/CTS — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS gates transmissions.
Product Reference Guide
291
References
•
•
RTS/XON/XOFF — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS is ignored. XON and
XOFF gate transmissions.
RTS On/CTS — RTS is always asserted. CTS gates transmissions.
RTS/CTS Scan Control — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS gates transmissions and
controls enable and disable state of scanner.
RS-232/USB COM Parameters
Intercharacter Delay
This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay between the end of one character and the
beginning of the next. The delay can be set within a range of zero (0) to 990 milliseconds in
10ms increments. A setting of zero specifies no delay.
To set the delay:
1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.
2. Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 10ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.
3. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming
Mode.
4. Go to page 47 and scan the barcode: SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit.
This completes the procedure. See Table 28 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 28. Intercharacter Delay Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Setting
50ms
150ms
600ms
850ms
2
Divide by 10 (pad with leading
zeroes to yield two-digits)
05
15
60
85
3
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4
Scan SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING
5
6
292
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
‘0’ and ‘5’
‘5’ and ‘0’
‘6’ and ‘0’
‘8’ and ‘5’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
RS-232 Parameters
ACK NAK Options
This enables/disables the ability of the reader to support the RS-232 ACK/NAK protocol.
When configured, the reader and/or host sends an “ACK” when it receives data properly, and
sends “NAK” when the data is in error.
Options are:
• Disable
• Enable for label transmission — The reader expects an ACK/NAK response from the host
when a label is sent.
• Enable for host-command acknowledge — The reader will respond with ACK/NAK
when the host sends a command.
• Enable for label transmission and host-command acknowledge
ACK Character
This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the ACK character. ASCII
characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.
Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not
recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as 7 Data Bits.
1. Determine the desired character or value.
2. Use the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex equivalent
for the desired character/value.
3. Go to page 50 and scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE to enter Programming Mode.
4. Scan the barcode: SELECT ACK CHARACTER SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate two alpha-numeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent the desired character/value in step 1 above. The second character will
cause a two-beep indication.
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit.
See Table 29 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 29. ACK Character Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Character/Value
ACK
$
@
>
2
Hex equivalent from ASCII
Chart
0x06
0x24
0x40
0x3E
3
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4
Scan SELECT ACK CHARACTER SETTING
5
Scan Two Characters from
Appendix D, Keypad
6
Product Reference Guide
‘0’ and ‘6’
‘2’ and ‘4’
‘4’ and ‘0’
‘3’ AND ‘E’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
293
References
NAK Character
This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the NAK character. ASCII
characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.
Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host
commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set
as 7 Data Bits.
To set this feature:
1. Determine the desired character or value.
2. Use the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex equivalent
for the desired character/value.
3. Go to page 50 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter
Programming Mode.
4. Scan the barcode: SELECT NAK CHARACTER SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate two alpha-numeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent the desired character/value in step 1 above. The second character will
cause a two-beep indication.
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 30 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 30. NAK Character Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Character/Value
NAK
$
@
>
2
Hex equivalent from ASCII
Chart
0x15
0x24
0x40
0x3E
3
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4
Scan SELECT ACK CHARACTER SETTING
5
6
294
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
‘1’ and ‘5’
‘2’ and ‘4’
‘4’ and ‘0’
‘3’ AND ‘E’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
RS-232 Parameters
ACK NAK Timeout Value
This option specifies the amount of time the reader waits for an ACK character from the host
following label transmission. The selectable timeout range is 200 milliseconds to 15,000ms (15
seconds) in 200ms increments. A selection of 0 disables the timeout.
To set this value:
1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.
2. Divide the desired setting by 200 (setting is in 200ms increments). Pad the result with
leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.
3. Go to page 51 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter
Programming Mode.
4. Scan the barcode: SELECT ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 31 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 31. ACK NAK Timeout Value Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Setting
200ms
1,000ms (1 sec.)
5200ms (5.2 sec.)
15,000ms (15 sec.)
2
Divide by 200
01
05
26
75
3
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4
Scan SELECT ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE SETTING
5
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
6
Product Reference Guide
‘0’ and ‘1’
‘0’ and ‘5’
‘2’ and ‘6’
‘7’ and ‘5’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
295
References
ACK NAK Retry Count
This feature specifies the number of times the reader retries a label transmission due to a retry
condition. The selectable range is from 1 to 254 retries. A selection of 0 disables the count, and
a selection of 255 specifies unlimited retries.
To set this feature:
1. Determine the desired setting.
2. Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 = 005,
20 = 020, etc.
3. Go to page 51 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter
Programming Mode.
4. Scan the barcode: SELECT ACK NAK RETRY COUNT SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate three digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the number which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication
after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 32 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 32. ACK NAK Retry Count Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Setting
Disable Retry
Count
3 Retries
54 Retries
Unlimited Retries
2
Pad with leading zero(es)
000
003
054
255
3
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4
Scan SELECT ACK NAK RETRY COUNT SETTING
5
6
296
Scan Three Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘0’
‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘3’
‘0’, ‘5’ and ‘4’
‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
RS-232 Parameters
Disable Character
Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to disable the reader.
ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.
Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host
commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set
as 7 Data Bits.
To set the value:
1. Determine the desired character or value. A setting of 0xFF indicates the Disable Character is not used (not available).
2. Use the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex equivalent
for the desired character/value.
3. Go to page 53 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter
Programming Mode.
4. Scan the barcode: SELECT DISABLE CHARACTER SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate two alpha-numeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent the desired character/value in step 1 above. The second character will
cause a two-beep indication.
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 33 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 33. Disable Character Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired character/value
‘d’
‘}’
‘D’
Disable Command
Not Used
2
Hex equivalent from ASCII
Chart
0x64
0x7D
0x44
0xFF
3
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4
Scan SELECT DISABLE CHARACTER VALUE SETTING
5
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
6
Product Reference Guide
‘6’ and ‘4’
‘7’ and ‘D’
‘4’ and ‘4’
‘F’ AND ‘F’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
297
References
Enable Character
Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to enable the reader.
ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.
Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host
commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set
as 7 Data Bits.
To set this feature:
Determine the desired character or value. A setting of 0xFF indicates the Enable Character is
not used (not available).
1. Determine the desired character or value.
2. Use the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex equivalent
for the desired character/value.
3. Go to page 53 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter
Programming Mode.
4. Scan the barcode: SELECT ENABLE CHARACTER SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate two alpha-numeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent the desired character/value in step 2 above. The second character will
cause a two-beep indication.
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 34 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 34. Enable Character Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired character/value
‘e’
‘}’
‘E’
Enable Command
Not Used
2
Hex equivalent from ASCII
Chart
0x65
0x7D
0x45
0xFF
3
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4
Scan SELECT DISABLE CHARACTER VALUE SETTING
5
6
298
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
‘6’ and ‘5’
‘7’ and ‘D’
‘4’ and ‘5’
‘F’ AND ‘F’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Keyboard Interface
Keyboard Interface
Wedge Quiet Interval
Specifies the amount of time the reader looks for keyboard activity before it breaks the keyboard
connection in order to transmit data to host. The range is from 0 to 990ms in 10ms increments.
This feature applies ONLY to the Keyboard Wedge interface.
1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.
2. Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 10ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.
3. Go to page 62 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter
Prog. Mode.
4. Scan the barcode: SELECT WEDGE QUIET INTERVAL SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit.
This completes the procedure to set the Wedge Quiet Interval. See Table 35 for some examples
of how to set this feature.
Table 35. Wedge Quiet Interval Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Setting
10ms
150ms
600ms
850ms
2
Divide by 10 (and pad with
leading zeroes)
01
15
60
85
3
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4
Scan SELECT WEDGE QUIET INTERVAL SETTING
5
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
6
Product Reference Guide
‘0’ and ‘1’
‘1’ and ‘5’
‘6’ and ‘0’
‘8’ and ‘5’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
299
References
Intercharacter Delay
This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay between the end of one character and the
beginning of the next. The delay can be set within a range of zero (0) to 990 milliseconds in
10ms increments. A setting of zero specifies no delay.
This feature applies ONLY to the Keyboard Wedge interface.
To set the delay:
1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.
2. Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 10ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.
3. Go to page 63 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter
Programming Mode.
4. Scan the barcode: SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 36 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 36. Intercharacter Delay Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Setting
50ms
150ms
600ms
850ms
2
Divide by 10 (and pad with
leading zeroes to yield twodigits)
05
15
60
85
3
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4
Scan SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING
5
6
300
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
‘0’ and ‘5’
‘1’ and ‘5’
‘6’ and ‘0’
‘8’ and ‘5’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Keyboard Interface
Intercode Delay
Specifies the delay between labels transmitted to the host for this interface. The selectable range
for this feature is from 0 to 99 seconds.
Follow these instructions to set this feature:
1. Determine the desired setting.
2. Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 =
20, etc
3. Go to page 64 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter
Programming Mode.
4. Scan the barcode: SELECT INTERCODE DELAY SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 37 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 37. Wedge Intercode Delay Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Setting
No Delay
5 Seconds
60 Seconds
99 Seconds
2
Pad with leading zero(es)
00
05
60
99
3
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4
Scan SELECT INTERCODE DELAY SETTING
5
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
6
Product Reference Guide
‘0’ and ‘0’
‘0’ and ‘5’
‘6’ and ‘0’
‘9’ AND ‘9’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
301
References
Symbologies
Decoding Level
Decoding Levels are used to configure a barcode symbology decoder to be very aggressive to
very conservative depending on a particular customer’s needs.
• Level 1 results in a very conservative decoder at the expense of not being able to read
poorly printed or damaged labels.
• Level 5 results in a very aggressive decoder. This aggressive behavior allows decoding of
poorly printed and damaged labels at the expense of increasing the likelihood of decoding
errors.
• Level 3, which is the default setting, allows the majority of product labels to be decoded.
There are many factors that determine when to change the decoding level for a particular
symbology. These factors include spots, voids, non-uniform bar/space widths, damaged labels,
etc. that may be experienced in some barcode labels. If there are many hard to read or damaged
labels that cannot be decoded using a conservative setting, increase the decoding level to be
more aggressive. If the majority of labels are very good quality labels, or there is a need to
decrease the possibility of a decoder error, lower the decoding level to a more conservative level.
Set Length
Length Control allows you to select either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for
the specified symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.
Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum
label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode.
Length includes the barcode’s data characters only.
The number of characters that can be set varies, depending on the symbology. Reference the
page for your selected symbology to see specific variables.
1. Determine the desired character length (varies depending on symbology). Pad the number
with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.
2. Go to the Set Length page for your selected symbology and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming Mode.
3. Scan the barcode to SELECT LENGTH 1 SETTING for your selected symbology.
4. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the length setting which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort
and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Prog Mode.
302
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Symbologies
Set Length 2
This feature allows you to set one of the barcode lengths for the specified symbology. Length 2
is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed
Length Mode. See the page for the specific symbology for parameters.
The length that can be set varies depending on the symbology. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore
this length (only one fixed length).
Follow these instructions to set this feature:
1. Determine the desired character length (from 1 to 50 — or 0 to ignore this length). Pad
the number with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20,
etc.
2. Go to the Set Length page for your selected symbology and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming Mode.
3. Scan the barcode to SELECT LENGTH 2 SETTING for your selected symbology.
4. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad that represent
the length setting which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake, before the last character scan the CANCEL barcode
to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the
beginning.
5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure.
Product Reference Guide
303
References
Data Editing
It is not recommended to use these features with IBM interfaces.
CAUTION
When a barcode is scanned, additional information can be sent to the host computer along with
the barcode data. This combination of barcode data and supplementary user-defined data is
called a “message string.” The Data Editing features can be used to build specific user-defined
data into a message string.
There are several types of selectable data characters that can be sent before and after scanned
data. You can specify if they should be sent with all symbologies, or only with specific
symbologies. Figure 16 shows the available elements you can add to a message string:
Figure 16. Breakdown of a Message String
Label ID Transmission:
Enable this option to
transmit the Label ID you
configure for the scanned
symbology.
Prefix
Label ID
AIM ID
OR...
Bar Code Data
Label ID
Suffix
AIM ID: This function is used to identify and display the
common label identifier for its symbology. When enabled,
this ID code will be transmitted before the scanned bar
code data.
00 - 20 Characters (ASCII)
Additional advanced editing is available. See the Advanced formatting features
in the Datalogic Aladdin configuration software, or contact Technical Support
(described on page 10 for more information.
Please Keep In Mind...
•
•
•
•
304
Modifying a message string is not a mandatory requirement. Data editing is a sophisticated feature allowing highly customizable output for advanced users. Factory default settings for data editing is typically set to NONE.
A prefix or suffix may be applied only to a specified symbology (reference Code
Selection, starting on page 107) or across all symbologies (set via the Global features in
this chapter).
You can add any character from the ASCII Chart (from 00-FF) on the inside back cover of
this manual as a prefix, suffix or Label ID.
Enter prefixes and suffixes in the order in which you want them to appear on the output.
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Data Editing
Global Prefix/Suffix
Up to 20 ASCII characters may be added as a prefix (in a position before the barcode data) and/
or as a suffix (in a position following the barcode data) as indicated in Figure 17.
Figure 17. Prefix and Suffix Positions
OR...
Prefix
Label ID
AIM ID
Bar Code Data
Label ID
Suffix
00 - 20 Characters (ASCII)
AND
OR
Example: Setting a Prefix
In this example, we’ll set a prefix for all symbologies.
1. Determine which ASCII character(s) are to be added to scanned barcode data. In this
example, we’ll add a dollar sign (‘$’) as a prefix.
2. Go to page 78 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode.
3. Scan the SET GLOBAL PREFIX barcode.
4. Reference the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex value
assigned to the desired character. The corresponding hex number for the ‘$’ character is
24. To enter this selection code, scan the ‘2’ and ‘4’ barcodes from Appendix D, Keypad.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
5. If less than the expected string of 20 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode to terminate the string.
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode once again to exit Programming Mode.
7. The resulting message string would appear as follows:
Scanned barcode data:12345
Resulting message string output: $12345
Product Reference Guide
305
References
Global AIM ID
This feature enables/disables addition of AIM IDs for all symbology
types.
AIM label identifiers (as opposed to custom characters you select yourself as with label
identifiers) can be included with scanned barcode data. AIM label identifiers consist of three
characters as follows:
• A close brace character (ASCII ‘]’), followed by...
• A code character (see the table below), followed by...
• A modifier character (the modifier character is symbol dependent).
SYMBOLOGY
CHAR
SYMBOLOGY
CHAR
UPC/EAN
Ea
Code 128/GS1-128
C
Code 39 and
Code 32
A
DataBar Omnidirectional,
DataBar Expanded
e
Codabar
F
Standard 2 of 5
S
Interleaved 2 of 5
I
ISBN
Xb
Code 93
G
Code 11
H
a. UPC-A and UPC-E labels are converted to EAN 13 when adding AIM IDs.
b. ISBN (X with a 0 modifier character)
Figure 18. AIM ID
Prefix
306
Label ID
AIM ID
Bar Code Data
Label ID
Suffix
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Data Editing
Label ID
A Label ID is a customizable code of up to three ASCII characters (each can be one of hex 0x010xFF), used to identify a barcode (symbology) type. It can be appended previous to or following
the transmitted barcode data depending upon how this option is enabled. This feature provides
options for configuring custom Label IDs as a pre-loaded set (see "Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets"
below) or individually per symbology (see "Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology"on
page 309). If you wish to program the reader to always include an industry standard label
identifier for ALL symbology types, see "Global AIM ID"on page 79.
Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets
The reader supports two pre-loaded sets of Label IDs. Table 38 shows the USA and the EU sets.
CAUTION
When changing from one Label ID set to another, all other reader configuration settings, including the host interface type, will be erased and set to
the standard factory defaults. Any custom configuration or custom defaults
will be lost.
Table 38. Label ID Pre-loaded Sets
Symbology
USA Label ID set
EU Label ID set
ASCII
character
Hexidecimal
value
ASCII
character
Hexidecimal
value
ABC Codabar
S
530000
S
530000
Anker Plessey
o
6F0000
o
6F0000
CODABAR
%
250000
R
520000
Codablock F
l
6C0000
m
6D0000
CODE11
CE
434500
b
620000
CODE128
#
230000
T
540000
CODE32
A
410000
X
580000
CODE39
*
2A0000
V
560000
CODE39 CIP
Y
590000
Y
590000
CODE4
4
340000
4
340000
CODE5
j
6A0000
j
6A0000
CODE93
&
260000
U
550000
DATALOGIC 2OF5
s
730000
s
730000
EAN13
F
460000
B
420000
EAN13 P2
F
460000
L
4C0000
EAN13 P5
F
460000
M
4D0000
EAN13 P8
F
460000
#
230000
Product Reference Guide
307
References
Label ID Pre-Loaded Sets (continued)
Symbology
USA Label ID set
ASCII
character
Hexidecimal
value
ASCII
character
Hexidecimal
value
EAN8
FF
464600
A
410000
EAN8 P2
FF
464600
J
4A0000
EAN8 P5
FF
464600
K
4B0000
EAN8 P8
FF
464600
*
2A0000
FOLLETT 2OF5
O
4F0000
O
4F0000
GS1 DATABAR EXPANDED
RX
525800
t
740000
GS1 DATABAR LIMITED
RL
524C00
v
760000
GS1 DATABAR OMNIDIRECTIONAL
R4
523400
u
750000
000000
k
6B0000
GS1-128
308
EU Label ID set
GTIN
G
470000
$A
244100
GTIN2
G2
473200
$B
244200
GTIN5
G5
473500
$C
244300
GTIN8
G8
473800
$D
244400
IATA
IA
494100
&
260000
Industrial 2 of 5
W
570000
W
570000
Interleaved 2 of 5
i
690000
N
4E0000
Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR
e
650000
e
650000
ISBN
I
490000
@
400000
ISBT128
f
660000
f
660000
ISSN
n
6E0000
n
6E0000
MSI
@
400000
Z
5A0000
Plessey
a
610000
a
610000
S25
s
730000
P
500000
UPCA
A
410000
C
430000
UPCA P2
A
410000
F
460000
UPCA P5
A
410000
G
470000
UPCA P8
A
410000
Q
510000
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Data Editing
Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology
To configure a Label ID individually for a single symbology:
1. Go to page 81 and scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode.
2. Select Label ID position as either BEFORE (Enable as Prefix) or AFTER (Enable as suffix) by scanning the appropriate barcode in the section "Label ID Control"on page 82.
Reference Figure 19 for Label ID positioning options if multiple identification features are
enabled.
3. Scan a barcode to select the symbology for which you wish to configure a custom Label
ID from the section "Label ID Symbology Selection"on page 83.
4. Determine the desired character(s) (you may choose up to three) which will represent the
Label ID for the selected symbology.
5. Turn to the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual and find the equivalent
hex digits associated with your choice of Label ID. For example, if you wish to select an
equal sign (=) as a Label ID, the chart indicates its associated hex characters as 3D. Turn to
Keypad, starting on page 351 and scan the barcodes representing the hex characters determined. For the example given, the characters ‘3’ and ‘D’ would be scanned. More examples of Label ID settings are provided in Table 39.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode to exit Label ID entry.
7. Scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode once again to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the steps to configure a Label ID for a given symbology.
Figure 19. Label ID Position Options
Prefix
Label ID
Aim ID
Bar Code Data
Label ID
Suffix
OR
Product Reference Guide
309
References
Table 39. Label ID Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1.
Scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode
(Scanner enters Programming Mode)
2.
Determine placement of the
Label ID characters BEFORE or
AFTER with regard to scanned Enable as Prefix
data using Label ID
Control, starting on page 82
Enable as Suffix
Enable as Prefix
Enable as Suffix
3.
Scan the barcode selecting the
symbology type you wish to
DataBar
designate label ID characters
Omnidirectional
for using Label ID Symbology
Selection, starting on page 83.
Code 39
Interleaved 2 of 5
Code 32
4.
Custom Label ID example
(desired characters):
D B *
=C3
+
PH
5.
Find hex equivalents from the
ASCII Chart (inside back
cover), then scan in these
digits/characters using the
barcodes in the section:
Keypad, starting on page 351.
If you make a mistake before
the last character, scan the
CANCEL barcode to abort and
not save the entry string. You
can then start again at the
beginning.
44 42 2A
3D 43 33
2B
50 48
6.
Scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode
(Scanner exits Label ID entry)
7.
Scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode
once again
(Scanner exits Programming Mode)
Result:
310
DB*[barcode
data]
[barcode
data]=C3
+[barcode data]
[barcode data]PH
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Data Editing
Character Conversion
Character conversion is an eight byte configuration item. The eight bytes are 4 character pairs
represented in hexadecimal ASCII values. The first character in the pair is the character that will
be converted. The second character in the pair is the character to convert to. If the character to
convert in a pair is FF, then no conversion is done.
For example, if you have the character conversion configuration item set to the following:
41423132FFFFFFFF
The first pair is 4142 or AB (41 hex is an ASCII capital A, 42 hex is an ASCII capital B) and the
second pair is 3132 or 12 (31 hex is an ASCII 1, 32 is an ASCII 2). The other two pairs are
FFFF and FFFF.
With the label, AB12BA21, it would look as follows after the character conversion: BB22BB22.
The A characters were converted to B characters and the 1 characters were converted to 2
characters. Nothing is done with the last two character pairs, since they are all FF.
To set Character Conversion:
1. Go to page 90 and scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode.
2. Scan the “Configure Character Conversion” barcode.
3. Determine the desired string. Sixteen positions must be determined as in the above example. Next, turn to the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual and find the
equivalent hex digits needed to fulfill the string.
4. Turn to Appendix D, Keypad and scan the barcodes representing the hex characters determined in the previous step.
5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode to exit Programming Mode.
If less than the expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan
the ENTER/EXIT barcode twice to accept the selections and exit Programming Mode.
Product Reference Guide
311
References
Reading Parameters
Label Gone Timeout
This feature sets the time after the last label segment is seen before the reader prepares for a new
label. The timeout can be set within a range of 10 milliseconds to 2,550 milliseconds (2.55
seconds) in 10ms increments. Label Gone Timeout does not apply to scan modes that require a
trigger pull for each label that is read
Follow these instructions to set this feature:
1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.
2. Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 10ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 = 005, 20 = 020, etc.
3. Go to page 93 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter
Programming Mode.
4. Scan the barcode: SELECT LABEL GONE TIMEOUT SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate three alpha-numeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D,
Keypad representing the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear
a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 40 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 40. Timeout Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Setting
50ms
150ms
1800ms (1.8 sec.)
2550ms (2.55 sec.)
2
Divide by 10 (and pad with
leading zeroes)
005
015
180
255
3
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4
Scan SELECT LABEL GONE TIMEOUT SETTING
5
6
312
Scan Three Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘5’
‘0’, ‘1’ and ‘5’
‘1’, ‘8’ and ‘0’
‘‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Reading Parameters
Good Read LED Duration
This feature specifies the amount of time that the Good Read LED remains on following a good
read. The good read LED on time can be set within a range of 10 milliseconds to 2,550
milliseconds (0.001 to 2.55 seconds) in 100ms increments.
Follow these instructions to set this feature:
1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds. A setting of 0 means that the good read
LED stays on until the next time the trigger is pulled.
2. Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 100ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 = 000, 20 = 020, etc.
3. Go to page 100 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to
enter Programming Mode.
4. Scan the barcode: SELECT GOOD READ LED DURATION SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate three digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad representing
the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 41 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 41. Good Read LED Duration Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Setting
Good Read LED
stays on until next
trigger pull (00)
20ms
150ms
2550ms (2.55 sec.)
2
Divide by 10 (and pad with
leading zeroes)
000
002
015
255
3
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4
Scan SELECT LABEL GONE TIMEOUT SETTING
5
Scan Three Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
6
Product Reference Guide
‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘0’
‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘2’
‘0’, ‘1’ and ‘5’
‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
313
References
Scanning Features
Scan Mode
This mode is associated with typical handheld reader operation. Selects the scan operating mode
for the reader. The following selections are valid for all models:
Trigger Single. When the trigger is pulled, scanning is activated until one of the following
occurs:
- Scanning Active Time has elapsed
- a label has been read
- the trigger is released
Trigger Hold Multiple. When the trigger is pulled, scanning starts and the product scans until
the trigger is released or Scanning Active Time has elapsed. Reading a label does not disable
scanning. Double Read Timeout prevents undesired multiple reads of the same label while in
this mode.
Trigger Pulse Multiple. When the trigger is pulled, continuous scanning is activated until
Scanning Active Time has elapsed or the trigger has been released and pulled again. Double
Read Timeout prevents undesired multiple reads of the same label while in this mode.
Flashing. The reader flashes1 on and off regardless of the trigger status. Flash rate is controlled
by Flash On Time and Flash Off Time. When Flash is ON the imager reads continuously; when
Flash is OFF scanning is deactivated.
Flashing is the recommended scan mode for Gryphon L hands-free
(stand mode) of operation
Always On. No trigger pull is required to read a barcode. Scanning is continually on. If the
trigger is pulled, the reader acts as if it is in Trigger Single Mode. Double Read Timeout
prevents undesired multiple reads of the same label while in this mode.
The following two features are valid only for the Gryphon I (desk and mobile), but not the
Gryphon Laser model. See "Laser Features"on page 287 for specific parameters for the Laser
model.
Stand Mode. No trigger pull is required to read a barcode. Scanning is turned on automatically
when an item is placed in the reader’s field of view. If the trigger is pulled, the reader acts as if it
in single read mode. Double Read Timeout prevents undesired multiple reads while in this
mode.
Trigger Object Sense. This mode is similar to Stand Mode, except that a trigger pull is required
to activate the decoder.
1. Controlled by Flash On Time.
314
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Scanning Features
Scanning Active Time
This setting specifies the amount of time that the reader stays in scan ON state once the state is
entered. The range for this setting is from 1 to 255 seconds in 1-second increments.
Follow these instructions to set this feature:
1. Determine the desired setting.
2. Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 = 005, 20
= 020, etc.
3. Go to page 104 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to
enter Programming Mode.
4. Scan the barcode: SELECT SCANNING ACTIVE TIME SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate three digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 42 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 42. Scanning Active Time Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Setting
1 Second
90 Sec. (1.5 min.)
2
Pad leading zero(es)
001
090
180 Sec. (3 min.) 255 Seconds (4.25 min.)
180
3
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4
Scan SELECT SCANNING ACTIVE TIME SETTING
5
Scan Three Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
6
Product Reference Guide
‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘1’
‘0’, ‘9’ and ‘0’
‘1’, ‘8’ and ‘0’
255
‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
315
References
Flash On Time
This feature specifies the ON time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The selectable
range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond increments.
Follow these instructions to set this feature.
1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.
2. Divide the desired setting by 100 (setting is in 100ms increments). Pad the result with
leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.
3. Go to page 105 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to
enter Programming Mode.
4. Scan the barcode: SELECT FLASH ON TIME SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad representing the
duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication
after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 43 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 43. Flash On Time Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Setting
500ms
1,000ms (1 sec.)
5200ms (5.2 sec.)
9,900ms (9.9 sec.)
2
Divide by 100 (and pad with
leading zeroes to yield two
digits)
05
10
52
99
‘5’ and ‘2’
‘9’ and ‘9’
3
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4
Scan SELECT FLASH OFF TIME SETTING
5
6
316
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
‘0’ and ‘5’
‘1’ and ‘0’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Scanning Features
Flash Off Time
This feature specifies the OFF time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The selectable
range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond increments.
Follow these instructions to set this feature.
1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.
2. Divide the desired setting by 100 (setting is in 100ms increments). Pad the result with
leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.
3. Go to page 105 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to
enter Programming Mode.
4. Scan the barcode: SELECT FLASH OFF TIME SETTING.
5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 44 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 44. Flash Off Time Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Setting
500ms
1,000ms (1 sec.)
5200ms (5.2 sec.)
9,900ms (9.9 sec.)
2
Divide by 100 (and pad with
leading zeroes to yield two
digits)
05
10
52
99
‘5’ and ‘2’
‘9’ and ‘9’
3
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4
Scan SELECT FLASH OFF TIME SETTING
5
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
6
Product Reference Guide
‘0’ and ‘5’
‘1’ and ‘0’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
317
References
Display Settings
Display Mode
The user can control the reader display behavior according to the following selections:
Local Echo mode: When a barcode is read with the reader:
• The code is sent to the Host.
• The reader display is cleared.
• The code is also sent to the reader display (Local Echo).
• The cursor is positioned after the last printed character on the reader display.
Normal mode: When a barcode is read with the reader:
• The code is sent to the Host.
• The reader display is not cleared. Therefore if any previous data was displayed on the
reader screen it remains.
• There is no Local Echo to the reader display.
Clear Display After Decode mode: When a barcode is read with the reader:
• The code is sent to the Host.
• The reader display is cleared. Therefore if any previous data was displayed on the reader
screen it is cancelled and the screen remains blank.
• There is no Local Echo of the code to the reader display.
Host messages sent to the reader are always written to the reader display.
RF Features
Configuration Update
Automatic Configuration Update
When this feature is enabled, the base station and reader will keep their configurations
synchronized. If a reader's configuration is altered by reading programming labels, this change is
automatically transferred and updated in a linked base station. Likewise, if the base station's
configuration is changed using Aladdin or by host commands, then the reader's configuration
will automatically be updated if this feature is enabled.
RF Address Stamping
Source Radio Address Delimiter Character
This option specifies the delimiter character to be placed between the label data and radio
address when address stamping is enabled.
This feature only applies if "Source Radio Address Transmission"on
page 270 is enabled.
318
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
RF Features
Follow these instructions to select the delimiter character:
1. Determine the desired character, then find its hexadecimal equivalent on the ASCII Chart
on the inside back cover. A setting of 00 specifies no delimiter character.
2. Go to page 271 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to
enter Programming Mode.
3. Scan the barcode: SET SOURCE RADIO ADDRESS DELIMITER CHARACTER.
4. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the hexidecimal characters which were determined in the steps above. You will hear a twobeep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 45 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 45. Source Radio Address Delimiter Character Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Setting
No delimiter
character
, (comma)
- (dash)
2
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
3
Scan SET SOURCE RADIO ADDRESS DELIMiTER CHARACTER
4
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
5
Product Reference Guide
‘0’ and ‘0’
‘2’ and ‘C’
‘2’ and ‘D’
/ (slash)
‘2’ AND ‘F’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
319
References
STAR Radio Protocol Timeout
This parameter sets the valid wait time before transmission between the handheld reader and
Base Station is considered failed.
When setting this parameter, take into consideration the radio traffic (number of readers in the
same area). The selectable range for this feature is from 02 to 25 seconds.
Follow these instructions to set this feature:
1. Determine the desired setting.
2. Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 2 = 02, 5 = 05, 25 =
25, etc
3. Go to page 272 and scanScan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to
enter Programming Mode.
4. Scan the barcode: SELECT RADIO PROTOCOL TIMEOUT.
5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent
the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming
Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 46 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 46. STAR Radio Protocol Timeout Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Setting
2 Seconds
5 Seconds
10 Seconds
25 Seconds
2
Pad with leading zero(es)
02
05
10
25
3
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4
Scan SELECT INTERCODE DELAY SETTING
5
6
320
Scan Two Characters From
Appendix D, Keypad
‘0’ and ‘2’
‘0’ and ‘5’
‘1’ and ‘0’
‘2’ AND ‘5’
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
RF Features
BT-Only Features
BT Pin Code
This option specifies the pin code (either 4- or 16-characters) to be used for authentication of
the BT link.
To set the pin code:
1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming
Mode, then enable "BT Security Mode" on page 280.
2. Specify the desired pin code length (4 or 16) by scanning the appropriate bar code in
"Select PIN Code Length" on page 281.
3. Determine the desired characters. For example, D254 or TOR12345678135M
4. Convert the characters to hexadecimal using the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of
this manual.
5. Go to page 281 and Scan the bar code: SET 4 CHAR PIN CODE or SET 16-CHAR
PIN CODE.
6. Scan the appropriate alphanumeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad,
representing the hexadecimal entries determined in the steps above. You will hear a twobeep indication after the last character.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to
abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
7. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming
Mode.
Changing the pin code setting will unlink the devices. If the Automatic Configuration Update is set to the default enabled setting, the devices must only be
relinked. If the Automatic Configuration Update is set to the disabled setting,
the Pin Code setting must also be updated in the Base Station using Aladdin.
After the Base Station has been updated, the devices must be relinked.
Table 47. BT Pin Code Setting Examples
STEP
ACTION
EXAMPLES
1
Desired Setting
D254
STOR12345678135M
2
Convert the characters to
hexadecimal
44 32 35 34
53 54 4F 52 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 31 33 35 4D
3
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
4
Scan SET BT PIN CODE
5
Scan 8 or 32 Alphanumeric
Characters From Appendix
44323534
53544F5231323334353637383133354D
D, Keypad
6
Product Reference Guide
Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
321
References
NOTES
322
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Chapter 7
Message Formatting
Message Formatting
Message Formatting is only available for the Gryphon™ Mobile
model.
A message from the Host to the base must follow these rules:
• If Address stamping options or address delimiter are enabled on the base, the Host replay
must have address field and delimiter too. Otherwise the message will be ignored. Address
delimiter is present only when address stamping is enabled.
• Address stamping is necessary to correctly route the message to the Gryphon I, especially
when more than one handheld is linked to the same base. Address stamping could be disabled if the system is in point to point configuration. If address stamping is not enabled,
the messages are addressed to the first handheld linked to the base.
• Messages end with “CR” 0x0D ASCII character. The CR character cannot be contained
in the middle.
• Messages cannot start with '$' or # because these are reserved for Service mode command
• Base station can receive host message only if Host Commands Obey/Ignore is set to
Ignore.
• Message could be sent to the HH in response to a Label when “Transmit mode” require
Ack from Host (see transmit mode parameter) or at any time. When messages are sent not
in response to a label must start with DC2 0x12 ASCII character and could be sent in any
transmit mode setting.
• Message could be sent to all HH linked to base by using a Multicast message:
“00 00 00 00 2A AA”
• In order to receive a message, handhelds must not be in sleep state.
The format of the ACK from Host message (used for transmission mode 02) is:
[Scanner_Addr] [Scanner_Addr_delimiter] MESSAGE <CR>
The format of a generic message From Host to HH is:
[Scanner_Addr] [Scanner_Addr_delimiter] DC2 MESSAGE <CR>
where DC2 is ASCII 0x12 (^R) character.
[Items in square brackets are optional.]
Product Reference Guide
323
Message Formatting
•
If you want to control the Scanner's beeper from the host, you will also probably want to
disable the good transmission beep that is emitted when the code is received from the cradle. (See Wireless Beeper Features on page 259).
The message field can store plain text and escape sequences.
• Escape sequences are interpreted as commands.
• Plain text is directly printed on the display. If writing beyond the end of line, the display
does not wrap automatically. Extra characters are ignored. Control characters are not
interpreted (i.e. LF, FF, etc.).
Cursor Control
ESC [ n A
Up n rows, no scroll
ESC [ n B
Down n rows, no scroll
ESC [ n C
Right n columns
ESC [ n D
Left n columns
ESC [ G
CR
ESC [ r ; c H
Move to row r , column c (ESC[1;1H is the upper left
character position of the display)
ESC D
Down 1 row, with scroll
CR and cursor down 1 row with scroll
Up 1 row and scroll
ESC E
ESC M
NOTES:
•
•
•
Since CR is used as the message terminator, you must use ESC [ G or ESC E to print a
CR.
The cursor row position is not affected by the currently selected font. The display always
has 4 rows, so when writing with the large font, actually two rows are written to: the current one and the one below it. You will need two ESC E commands to step from one row
to the next when using the large font.
The cursor column position is affected by the currently selected font. Therefore, column
6 is 36 pixels from the left border only if you last selected the 6x8 font; otherwise it could
be 48 or 72 pixels from the left border.
Font Selection
ESC [ 0 m
ESC [ 7 m
ESC # 4
ESC # 5
ESC # 7
324
Normal mode
Reverse mode
Large font: subsequent characters are written on the
current row and the row below it using the 12x16 font
which allows for two rows of eight characters on the display.
Normal font: subsequent characters are written using
the 6x8 font, which allows for four rows of sixteen characters on the display.
Medium font: subsequent characters are written using
the 8x8 font, which allows for 4 rows of 12 characters on
the display.
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Message Formatting
Clearing Display
ESC [ 0 K
ESC [ 1 K
ESC [ 2 K
ESC [ 0 J
ESC [ 1 J
ESC [ 2 J
From cursor position to end of line inclusive
From beginning of line to cursor position (not inclusive)
Entire line
From cursor position to end of display inclusive
From beginning of display to cursor position (not inclusive)
Entire display; moves cursor to upper left corner on display
LED and Beeper Control
ESC [ 0 q
ESC [ 1 q
ESC [ 2 q
ESC [ 3 q
ESC [ 4 q
ESC [ 5 q
ESC [ 6 q
ESC [ 7 q
ESC [ 8 q
ESC [ 9 q
ESC [ 0 r
ESC [ 1 r
Emit short High tone + short delay
Emit short Low tone + short delay
Emit long Low tone + short delay
Emit good read tone
Emit bad tx tone
Wait 100 ms
Turn on the green LED
Turn off the green LED
Turn on the green spot
Turn off the green spot
Beep for Find me function (new)
Power-off (new)
The LED control escape sequences are intended to activate the LEDs for short periods of time
and can be used in combination with the Beeper. The LED and Beeper will be controlled by the
system after the entire command sequence is interpreted.
Example:
Turns on the green LED, emits a good read tone, and turns off the
green LED.
ESC [ 6 q ESC [ 5 q ESC [ 7 q Turns on the green LED for 100 ms and then turns off the green LED.
ESC [ 6 q ESC [ 3 q ESC [ 7 q
Product Reference Guide
325
Message Formatting
Messages from Scanner Command Keys
The Gryphon™ I series scanners with display have 3 command keys that can each be associated
with a character to send to the host.
By pressing the keys on the scanner, the associated character with its relative message formatting
is sent to the Host. For example, keys can be used to select items from a menu sent to the
scanner display by the application program.
The messages are handled by the system as if they were barcodes, that's why KeyID can have so
many fields appended to it. If in your application there is some chance of reading a 1-char
barcode identical to KeyID, the way you can distinguish between the two is to enable the Code
ID: The KeyID is the only 1-character long EAN 8 code.
The default characters associated with each key (KeyID) are shown in the following table:
326
(left) Key
'<'
(center) Key
'='
(right) Key
'>'
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Appendix A
Technical Specifications
Table 48 contains Physical and Performance Characteristics, User Environment and Regulatory
information. Table 49 provides Standard Cable Pinouts.
Table 48. Technical Specifications
Item
Description
Physical Characteristics
Color
Dimensions
Weight (without cable)
White/Gray
Gray/Gray
Height 7.1”/181 mm
Length 3.9”/100 mm
Width 2.8”/71 mm
GD 41x0/GD4300 : Approximately 6.0 ounces/169 g
GM4100/GBT4100: Approximately 8.7 ounces/246 g
BC40x0: Approximately 8.7 ounces/246 g
BC40x0-CF: Approximately 10.1 ounces/290 g
Electrical Characteristics
Voltage & Current
GD4130 model:
5V±5% Input range. 1.9W max.
360 mA (max) at 5V
2.5 mA RS-232 sleep mode/ USB suspend
GD4330 model:
Input current at 5V±5% = 260 mA (max)
2.5 mA (USB suspend)
Standby (typical) <= 30mA
GD4110 model:
4.5÷14V Input range. Power 1.8W max.
340 mA (max) at 5V.
2.5 mA (RS-232 sleep mode / USB suspend)
GD4310 model:
Input Power =
1.2W max in the 4.5÷14V range
2.5 mA (USB suspend)
Standby (typical): 30mA @5V (90mA @5V for
IBM46xx)
BC40x0 base:
4.75-14V; Input range. Power 8W max a;
Imax 500mA when in host/bus powered
modea.
Battery Type
Charge time for full charge
from full discharge
Product Reference Guide
BC40x0-CF base:
10-14V; Input range. Power 8W maxa ;
Imax 800mA .
Li-Ion battery pack
4 hours with 12v external power supply adapterb
Max 22h hours with Host power
(In this case no supply adapter is needed)b
327
Technical Specifications
Item
Description
GM4100: 50,000 reads (typical)
GBT4100: 30,000 reads (typical)
Operating autonomy
(continuous reading)
Performance Characteristics
Light Source
GD41x0 model:
GD43x0 model:
Dual LEDs
650nm Class 2 Laser
Roll (Tilt) Tolerance
± 35° from normal
Pitch Tolerance
GD 41x0/GM4100/GBT4100: ± 65°
GD4300: ± 50°
Skew (Yaw) Tolerance
Field of View
Depth of Field (Typical) c (
Minimum Element Width
Print Contrast Minimum
± 65°
10” (25.4cm) wide at 12.5” (31.8cm)
from the reader
3 mil – 2.9” to 4.7” (7.5cm to 12cm)
13 mil c – 1.2” to 23.6” (3cm to 60cm)
20 mil – 1.2” to 31.5” (3cm to 80cm)
Scan Angle: 47° (normal) or 35° (narrow)
5 mil - 1.4" to 6.22" (3,6cm to 15,8cm)
13 milc – 0.87" to 18.7" (2,2cm to 47,5cm)
20 mil – up to 27.1" (to 69cm)
3 mil
4 mil
15% minimum reflectance
Decode Capability
UPC/EAN/JAN, P2 /P5, ISBN/ISSN; Code 39, Code39 FullASCII; Italian Pharmacode 39, Code39
CIP; Code 128, GS1-128; C128 ISBT; Code 128 addons;I 2 of 5; Standard 2 of 5; I 2 of 5 CIP HR;
Industrial 2 of 5; IATA; Datalogic 2 of 5; Follet 2 of 5; Code 11; Plessey, Anker Plessey; Codabar,
ABC Codabar ; Code 93; MSI; GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional, GS1 DataBar™ Limited, GS1
DataBar™ Expanded; Code 4, Code 5; Codablock F, Codablock F EAN;
Interfaces Supportedd
RS-232 Std, RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf, RS-232 OPOS, IBM 46xx (ports 5B and 9B), USB Com Std.,
USB Keyboard, USB Alternate Keyboard,USB OEM, Keyboard Wedge (AT with or w/o Alternate
Key, IBM AT PS2 with or w/o Alternate Key, PC-XT, IBM 3153, IBM Terminals 31xx, 32xx,34xx,
37xx make only and make break keyboard, Digital Terminals VT2x, VT3xx, VT4xx, and Apple)
and Wand Emulation.
User Environment
Operating Temperature
GD 41x0: 32° to 131° F (0° to 55° C)
GM4100/GBT4100/GD4300: 32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C)
Charging Temperature
32° to 104° F (0° to 40° C)
Storage Temperature
-4° to 158° F (-20° to 70° C)
Humidity
Drop Specifications
Operating: 5% to 90% relative humidity, non-condensing
18 drops from 1.8 meters (5.9 feet) to concrete
Ambient Light Immunity
Up to 100,000 Lux
Contaminants Spray/Rain/
Dust/Particulates
IP52
ESD Level
328
16 KV
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Technical Specifications
Item
Description
Regulatory
Electrical Safety
EMI/RFI
See the Quick Reference Guide for each specific product for details.
Laser Safety
LED class safety
a.
b.
c.
d.
Typical input current measured under factory default configuration.
Charge Times are much lower when battery is within daily typical operating condition.
13 mils DOF based on EAN. All others are Code 39. All labels grade A, typical environmental light, 20°C, label inclination 10°
See "Interface Selection"on page 29 for a listing of available interface sets by model type.
Model
Radio Features
Working Center Frequency
Range (in open air)
Max. number of devices per base station
Product Reference Guide
433MHz model
910 Mhz
BT
433.920 MHz
910.000 MHz
2400 to 2483.5 MHz
30 m
15 m
30 m
16
16
1
329
Technical Specifications
Standard Cable Pinouts
Figure 20 and Table 49 provide standard pinout information for the Base Station’s interface
cable.
Figure 20. Standard Cable Pinouts
Bottom of Scanner
Cable Strain Relief
Pin 10
To Host
Pin 1
Cable Clip (Latch)
Cable
Interface Cable Port
The signal descriptions in Table 49 apply to the connector on the reader and are for reference
only.
Table 49. Standard Cable Pinouts — Reader Side
Pin
RS-232
1
RTS (out)
USB
Keyboard Wedge
2
D+
CLKIN (KBD side)
3
D-
DATAIN (KBD side)
GND
GND
GND
VCC
VCC
VCC
4
GND
5
RX
6
TX
7
VCC
8
IBM_B
CLKOUT (PC side)
9
IBM_A
DATAOUT (PC side)
10
330
OEM
CTS (in)
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Technical Specifications
LED and Beeper Indications
The reader’s beeper sounds and its LED illuminates to indicate various functions or errors on
the reader. An optional “Green Spot” also performs useful functions. The tables below list these
indications. One exception to the behaviors listed in the tables is that the reader’s functions are
programmable, and may or may not be turned on. For example, certain indications such as the
power-up beep can be disabled using programming barcode labels.
Table 50. LED and Beeper Indications
INDICATION
DESCRIPTION
Power-up Beep
The reader is in the process of powering-up.
Good Read Beep
A label has been successfully
scanned by the reader.
ROM Failure
There is an error in the reader's
software/programming
Limited Scanning
Label Read
Indicates that a host connection is
not established when the IBM or
USB interface is enabled.
Reader Active
Mode
LED
BEEPER
Reader beeps four times at highest
frequency and volume upon
power-up.
LED behavior for this indication is configurable via the
feature “Good Read: When
to Indicate”
The reader will beep once at current frequency, volume, mono/bitonal setting and duration upon a
successful label scan.
Flashes
Reader sounds one error beep at
highest volume.
N/A
Reader 'chirps' six times at the
highest frequency and current volume.
The reader is active and ready to
scan.
The LED is lit steadilya
N/A
Reader
Disabled
The reader has been disabled by
the host.
The LED blinks continuously
Green Spot is on
continuously
While in Stand Mode or Trigger
Stand Mode the green spot shall
be on while in stand watch state.
N/A
N/A
Green Spota
flashes momentarily
Upon successful read of a label, the
software shall turn the green spot
on for the time specified by the
configured value.
N/A
N/A
N/A
a. Except when in sleep mode or when a Good Read LED Duration other than 00 is selected
Product Reference Guide
331
Technical Specifications
Table 51. Programming Mode Indications
Programming Mode - The following indications ONLY occur when the reader is in Programming Mode.
Label Programming Mode Entry
A valid programming label has
been scanned.
Label Programming Mode Rejection of Label
A label has been rejected.
Label Programming Mode Acceptance of Partial
Label
In cases where multiple labels
must be scanned to program one
feature, this indication acknowledges each portion as it is successfully scanned.
Label Programming Mode Acceptance of
Programming
Configuration option(s) have been
successfully programmed via
labels and the reader has exited
Programming Mode.
Label Programming Mode Cancel Item Entry
Cancel label has been scanned.
LED blinks continuously
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Reader sounds four low frequency
beeps.
Reader sounds three times at lowest frequency & current volume.
Reader sounds one short beep at
highest frequency & current volume.
Reader sounds one high frequency
beep and 4 low frequency beeps
followed by reset beeps.
Reader sounds two times at low
frequency and current volume.
Error Codes
Upon startup, if the reader sounds a long tone, this means the reader has not passed its
automatic Selftest and has entered FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) isolation mode. If the reader is
reset, the sequence will be repeated. The following table describes the LED flashes/beep codes
associated with an error found.
NUMBER OF LED
FLASHES/BEEPS
ERROR
1
Configuration
2
Interface PCB
4
Reader Module
5
Laser Pointer (if so equipped)
6
Digital PCB
14
CPLD/Code Mismatch
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Contact Helpdesk for assistance
332
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Technical Specifications
Base Station Indications (Cordless Models ONLY)
INDICATION
LEDS
Power-up Complete
Yellow LED on
Reader Disabled by the HOST or the communication with HOST is
not established
Yellow LED blinking ~1Hz
Data/labels are transmitted to the HOST
Yellow LEDs turned off for 100mSec
Programming Mode
Yellow LED blinks quickly
Base and handheld are exchanging data
Red LED blinks quickly
Battery charging in progress
Red LED on
Battery charging complete
Green LED on
Battery charger error
Green LED and Red LEDs blink alternatively ~1Hz
No handheld is placed on the cradle
Red and Green LEDs off
Base Station Button Indicators
BUTTON PUSH
EVENT
CORDLESS
YELLOW
INDICATOR
RED
INDICATOR
GREEN
INDICATOR
Push at power-up
Force device connection (Aladdin)
Off
Off
Slow blink
Fast blink
< 1 sec (*)
UV LED On/Off
Off
Off
Off
1 to 5 sec
Paging
Off
Off
Fast blink
5 to 10 sec
Unlink (Only BT)
Off
Off
Slow blink
10 to 20 sec
Reset
Off
Fast blink
Off
> 20 sec
Restore factory defaults
Off
Slow blink
Off
(*) Only for models with UV Counterfeit Money Detector. See page 12 for more details
Product Reference Guide
333
Technical Specifications
NOTES
334
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Appendix B
Standard Defaults
The most common configuration settings are listed in the “Default” column of the table below.
Page references are also provided for feature descriptions and programming barcodes for each
parameter. A column has also been provided for recording of your preferred default settings for
these same configurable features.
Table 52. Standard Defaults
Parameter
Default
Your Setting
Page
Number
GLOBAL INTERFACE FEATURES
Host Commands — Obey/Ignore
Obey
39
Disable
39
Baud Rate
9600
42
Data Bits
8 Data Bits
43
Stop Bits
1 Stop Bit
43
None
44
RTS
45
No Delay
47
Beep On ASCII BEL
Disable
47
Beep On Not on File
Enable
48
ACK Character
‘ACK’
50
NAK Character
‘NAK’
50
ACK NAK Timeout Value
200 ms
51
ACK NAK Retry Count
3 Retries
51
Ignore Errors Detected
52
USB Suspend Mode
RS-232 ONLY
Parity
Handshaking Control
RS-232/USB-Com
Intercharacter Delay
ACK NAK Error Handling
Product Reference Guide
335
Standard Defaults
Parameter
Indicate Transmission Failure
Default
Your Setting
Page
Number
Enable
52
Disable Character
‘D’
53
Enable Character
‘E’
53
Country Mode
U.S. Keyboard
56
Caps Lock State
Caps Lock OFF
59
Numlock Key Unchanged
60
Control Character 00
61
Wedge Quiet Interval
100 ms
62
Intercharacter Delay
No Delay
63
100 ms
64
1 ms
65
Standard Keys
66
Handheld Scanner
68
Ignore Host Configuration
Commands
68
6
70
IBM Standard Format
72
Ignore Scanner Configuration Host Commands
72
660 ms
74
Quiet Zones & Spaces High,
Bars Low
74
Wand Idle State
High
75
Transmit Noise
Disable
75
No conversion
76
No Global Prefix
Global Suffix = 0x0D (CR)
78
Disable
79
KEYBOARD WEDGE
Numlock
Send Control Characters
Intercode Delay
USB Keyboard Speed
USB Keyboard Numeric Keypad
USB-OEM
USB-OEM Device Usage
Interface Options
IBM 46xx
46xx Number of Host Resets
Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format
Interface Options
Wand Emulation
Wand Signal Speed
Wand Polarity
Label Symbology Conversion
Data Format
Global Prefix/Suffix
Global AIM ID
336
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Standard Defaults
Parameter
Default
Your Setting
Page
Number
GS1-128 AIM ID
Enable
80
Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets
USA Set
81
Label ID Control
Disable
82
No Mid Label ID Character
89
Disable
90
No Char Conversion
90
0.6 Second
91
Label Gone Timeout
160 ms
93
Sleep Mode Timeout
Disable
94
Power On Alert
4 Beeps
96
After Decode
96
Mono
97
Medium
97
Good Read Beep Length
80 ms
98
Good Read Beep Volume
High
99
Good Read LED Duration
300 ms
100
Trigger Single
101
0.5 second
102
Switch to Stand mode
103
Medium
104
Scanning Active Time
5 Seconds
104
Flash On Time
1 Second
105
Flash Off Time
600 ms
105
Green Spot Duration
300 ms
106
Enable UPCA coupon
decoding
109
UPC-A Enable/Disable
Enable
110
UPC-A Check Character Transmission
Enable
110
Don’t Expand
111
Set Global Mid Label ID Characters
Case Conversion
Character Conversion
READING PARAMETERS
Double Read Timeout
Good Read: When to Indicate
Good Read Beep Type
Good Read Beep Frequency
Scan Mode
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout
Stand Detection
Stand Mode Sensitivity
Code Selection
Coupon Control
UPC-A
Expand UPC-A to EAN-13
Product Reference Guide
337
Standard Defaults
Parameter
UPC-A Number System Character Transmission
Default
Your Setting
Page
Number
Transmit
111
1
112
Enable
113
Send
113
Expand UPC-E to EAN-13
Don’t Expand
114
Expand UPC-E to UPC-A
Don’t Expand
114
Transmit
115
2
115
Disable
116
Enable
117
Send
117
EAN-13 Flag 1 Character
Transmit
118
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion
Disable
118
EAN 13 Minimum Reads
1
119
Disable
120
Enable
121
Send
121
Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13
Disable
122
EAN 8 Minimum Reads
1
122
2
123
UPC/EAN Correlation
Disable
124
UPC/EAN Price Weight Check
Disable
124
2
125
Disable P2, P5 and GS1-128
126
70 ms
127
UPC-A Minimum Reads
UPC-E
UPC-E Enable/Disable
UPC-E Check Character Transmission
UPC-E Number System Character Transmission
UPC-E Minimum Reads
GTIN
GTIN Formatting
EAN 13 (Jan 13)
EAN 13 Enable/Disable
EAN 13 Check Character Transmission
ISSN
ISSN Enable/Disable
EAN 8
EAN 8 Enable/Disable
EAN 8 Check Character Transmission
UPC/EAN Global Settings
UPC/EAN Decoding Level
In-Store Minimum Reads
Add-Ons
Optional Add-ons
Optional Add-On Timer
338
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Standard Defaults
Parameter
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer
Default
Your Setting
Page
Number
Disable
130
P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads
2
133
P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads
1
134
GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads
1
135
Enable
136
Don’t Calculate
136
Don’t Send
137
Don’t Transmit
138
Disable
138
Auto
139
Code 39 Minimum Reads
2
140
Code 39 Decoding Level
3
141
Code 39 Length Control
Variable
142
Code 39 Set Length 1
2
143
Code 39 Set Length 2
50
144
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio
4
145
Code 39 Character Correlation
Disable
147
Code 39 Stitching
Enable
147
Disable
148
N/A
148
Don’t Send
149
Don’t Transmit
149
Disable
148
Enable
151
Don’t Expand
151
Send
152
Code 128 Function Character Transmission
Don’t Send
152
Code 128 Sub-Code Change Transmission
Disable
153
Code 39
Code 39 Enable/Disable
Code 39 Check Character Calculation
Code 39 Check Character Transmission
Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission
Code 39 Full ASCII
Code 39 Quiet Zones
Code 32 (Italian Pharmaceutical Code)
Code 32 Enable/Disable
Code 32 Feature Setting Exceptions
Code 32 Check Char Transmission
Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission
Code 39 CIP (French Pharmaceutical Code)
Code 39 CIP Enable/Disable
Code 128
Code 128 Enable/Disable
Expand Code 128 to Code 39
Code 128 Check Character Transmission
Product Reference Guide
339
Standard Defaults
Parameter
Code 128 Quiet Zones
Default
Your Setting
Page
Number
Auto
154
Code 128 Minimum Reads
1
155
Code 128 Decoding Level
3
156
Code 128 Length Control
Variable
157
Code 128 Set Length 1
1
158
Code 128 Set Length 2
80
159
Code 128 Character Correlation
Disable
160
Code 128 Stitching
Enable
160
Transmit in GS1-128 data
format
161
ISBT 128 Concatenation
Disable
162
ISBT 128 Force Concatenation
Disable
162
ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode
Static
163
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout
200 msec
164
ISBT 128 Advanced Concatenation Options
Disable
164
Codablock F Enable/Disable
Disable
165
Codablock F EAN Enable/Disable
Disable
165
Enable check C
166
Variable
166
Codablock F Set Length 1
3 characters
167
Codablock F Set Length 2
100 characters
168
I 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
Disable
169
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
Disable
169
Send
170
I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads
2
192
2 of 5 Decoding Level
3
192
I 2 of 5 Length Control
Variable
173
6
174
GS1-128
GS1-128 Enable
ISBT 128
Codablock F
Codablock F AIM Check
Codablock F Length Control
Interleaved 2 of 5
I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
I 2 of 5 Set Length 1
340
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Standard Defaults
Parameter
I 2 of 5 Set Length 2
Default
Your Setting
Page
Number
50
175
I 2 of 5 Character Correlation
Disable
176
I 2 of 5 Stitching
Disable
176
Disable
177
Disable
177
Standard 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
Disable
178
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
Disable
178
Send
179
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads
2
179
Standard 2 of 5 Decoding Level
3
180
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control
Variable
180
Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 1
8
181
Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 2
50
182
Standard 2 of 5 Character Correlation
Disable
183
Standard 2 of 5 Stitching
Disable
183
Industrial 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
Disable
184
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
Disable
184
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
Enable
185
Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control
Variable
185
Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1
1
186
Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 2
50
187
Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads
1
188
Industrial 2 of 5 Stitching
Disable
188
Industrial 2 of 5 Character Correlation
Disable
189
IATA Enable/Disable
Disable
190
IATA Check Character Transmission
Enable
190
Follett 2 of 5
Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR
Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Enable/Disable
Standard 2 of 5
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
Industrial 2 of 5
Code IATA
Product Reference Guide
341
Standard Defaults
Your Setting
Page
Number
Parameter
Default
Datalogic 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
Disable
191
Datalogic 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
Disable
191
Datalogic 2 of 5 Minimum Reads
2
192
Datalogic 2 of 5 Decoding Level
3
192
Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control
Variable
193
Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 1
6 characters
194
Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 2
50
195
Datalogic 2 of 5 Character Correlation
Disable
196
Datalogic 2 of 5 Stitching
Disable
196
Disable
197
Don’t Calculate
197
Send
198
Transmit
198
abcd/abcd
199
Don’t Require Match
199
Auto
200
Codabar Minimum Reads
2
201
Codabar Decoding Level
3
202
Codabar Length Control
Variable
202
Codabar Set Length 1
3
204
Codabar Set Length 2
50
205
Codabar Interdigit Ratio
4
206
Codabar Character Correlation
Disable
208
Codabar Stitching
Disable
208
Disable
209
Static
209
200 msec
210
Disable
211
Datalogic 2 of 5
Codabar
Codabar Enable/Disable
Codabar Check Character Calculation
Codabar Check Character Transmission
Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission
Codabar Start/Stop Character Set
Codabar Start/Stop Character Match
Codabar Quiet Zones
ABC Codabar
ABC Codabar Enable/Disable
ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout
ABC Codabar Force Concatenation
342
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Standard Defaults
Parameter
Default
Your Setting
Page
Number
Code 11
Code 11 Enable/Disable
Disable
212
Check C and K
212
Send
213
Code 11 Minimum Reads
2
213
Code 11 Length Control
Variable
214
Code 11 Set Length 1
4
215
Code 11 Set Length 2
50
216
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio
4
217
Code 11 Decoding Level
3
219
Code 11 Character Correlation
Disable
220
Code 11 Stitching
Disable
220
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Enable/Disable
Disable
221
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation
Disable
221
1
222
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Enable/Disable
Disable
223
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation
Disable
223
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Minimum Reads
1
224
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control
Variable
224
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 1
1
225
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 2
74
226
GS1 DataBar™ Limited Enable/Disable
Disable
227
GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation
Disable
227
1
228
Disable
229
Enable Check C and K
229
Code 93 Check Character Transmission
Disable
230
Code 93 Length Control
Variable
230
Code 11 Check Character Calculation
Code 11 Check Character Transmission
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Minimum Reads
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded
GS1 DataBar™ Limited
GS1 DataBar™ Limited Minimum Reads
Code 93
Code 93 Enable/Disable
Code 93 Check Character Calculation
Product Reference Guide
343
Standard Defaults
Parameter
Default
Your Setting
Page
Number
Code 93 Set Length 1
1
231
Code 93 Set Length 2
50
232
Code 93 Minimum Reads
1
233
Code 93 Decoding Level
3
234
Auto
235
Code 93 Stitching
Enable
236
Code 93 Character Correlation
Disable
236
Disable
237
Enable Mod10
237
MSI Check Character Transmission
Enable
238
MSI Length Control
Variable
239
MSI Set Length 1
1
239
MSI Set Length 2
50
240
MSI Minimum Reads
4
241
MSI Decoding Level
3
242
Disable
243
Enable Plessey std. check
char. verification
244
Plessey Check Character Transmission
Enable
244
Plessey Length Control
Variable
245
Plessey Set Length 1
1
246
Plessey Set Length 2
50
247
Plessey Minimum Reads
4
248
Plessey Decoding Level
3
249
Plessey Stitching
Disable
250
Plessey Character Correlation
Disable
250
Disable
251
Send
251
Enable
252
Code 93 Quiet Zones
MSI
MSI Enable/Disable
MSI Check Character Calculation
Plessey
Plessey Enable/Disable
Plessey Check Character Calculation
Code 4
Code 4 Enable/Disable
Code 4 Check Character Transmission
Code 4 Hex to Decimal Conversion
344
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Standard Defaults
Parameter
Default
Your Setting
Page
Number
Code 5
Code 5 Enable/Disable
Disable
252
Send
253
Enable
253
Code 4 and 5 Decoding Level
3
254
Code 4 and Code 5 Minimum Reads
1
255
Enable
259
Low
259
Beep Duration
80 msec
260
Beep Volume
High
261
Disconnect Beep
Enable
261
Base Station Beep
Enable
262
Leash Alarm
Disable
262
Automatic Configuration Update
Enable
264
Automatic Flash Update
Disable
265
30 minutes
266
Disable
268
No Delay
269
Unlink label required
270
Do not include
270
No Delimiter Character
271
2 seconds
272
ACK from cradle
272
Code 5 Check Character Transmission
Code 5 Hex to Decimal Conversion
Code 4 and 5 Common Configuration Items
WIRELESS Features
Good Transmission Beep
Beep Frequency
Powerdown Timeout
Batch Mode
RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay
Direct Radio AutoLink
Source Radio Address Transmission
Source Radio Address Delimiter Character
Features for Star Models Only
STAR Radio Protocol Timeout
STAR Radio Transmit Mode
Display (STAR model only)
- Contrast
274
- Font Size
Small
274
- Backlight
Off
275
Local Echo mode
275
8 seconds
276
- Display Mode
- Display Timeout
Product Reference Guide
345
Standard Defaults
Parameter
Keypad Select
Default
Your Setting
Page
Number
3C3D3E
278
Disable
280
Select PIN Code Length
Select 4-character BT PIN
Code
281
Set PIN Code
31323334 = Default PIN
Code is 1234
281
Use Static PIN Code
282
BT HID ALT Mode
Disable
282
BT HID Send Unkown ASCII Char
Disable
283
BT Poll Rate
20 ms
284
Laser Scan Angle
47 degrees
288
Laser Idle Mode
Disable
288
Bi-Directional Read Decoding
Enable
289
Always On Scan Mode Timeout
5 Hours
290
Bluetooth-Only Features
BT Security Mode
BT HID Variable PIN Code
Laser Features
346
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Appendix C
Sample Bar Codes
The sample bar codes in this appendix are typical representations for their symbology types.
1D Bar Codes
UPC-A
EAN-13
978033029095
Code 39
Code 128
Code 128
Interleaved 2 of 5
Product Reference Guide
347
Sample Bar Codes
Sample Bar Codes — continued
Code 32
Codabar
13579
Code 93
Code 11
123456789
348
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Sample Bar Codes
GS1 DataBar™ (RSS)
GS1 DataBar™ variants must be enabled to read the bar codes below (see GS1 DataBar™
Omnidirectional on page 221).
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Stacked
10293847560192837465019283746029478450366523
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded
1234890hjio9900mnb
GS1 DataBar™ Limited
08672345650916
GS1 DataBar™-14
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Truncated
55432198673467
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Stacked
90876523412674
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Stacked
78123465709811
Product Reference Guide
349
Sample Bar Codes
NOTES
350
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Appendix D
Keypad
Use the barcodes in this appendix to enter numbers as you would select digits/characters from a
keypad.
0
1
2
3
4
5
Product Reference Guide
351
Keypad
6
7
8
9
HID Variable PIN Code
Cancel an incomplete HID Variable PIN Code
Exit HID Variable PIN Code
352
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Keypad
A
B
C
D
E
F
Product Reference Guide
353
Keypad
NOTES
354
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Appendix E
Scancode Tables
Control Character Emulation
Control character emulation selects from different scancode tables as listed in this appendix.
Each of the control character sets below are detailed by interface type in the tables. These apply
to Wedge and USB Keyboard platforms.
Control Character 00 . Characters from 00 to 0x1F are sent as control character Ctrl+Keys,
special keys are located from 0x80 to 0xA1.
Control Character 01 . Characters from 00 to 0x1F are sent as control character Ctrl+Capital
Key, special keys are located from 0x80 to 0xA1.
Control Character 02 . Special keys are located from 00 to 0x1F and characters from 0x80 to
0xFE are intended as an extended ASCII table (Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252 — See
page 362.)
Single Press and Release Keys
In the following tables, Ar↓ means Alt right pressed and Ar↑ means Alt right released and so on.
Definitions for other keys are Al (Alt left ), Cr (Control Right ) Cl (Control Left ) Sh (shift).
This method can be used for combining Alt, Control or Shift with other keys.
Example: Consider a Control character set to 00. If AltRight+A is required before sending a
label to the host, it could be done by setting three Prefix keys in this way: 0x99 0x41 0x9A.
Product Reference Guide
355
Interface Type PC AT PS/2, USB-Keyboard or USB-Keyboard for APPLE
Table 53. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01
0x
1x
x0
NULL
C+@
DLE
C(S)+P
x1
SOH
C(S)+A
DC1
C(S)+Q
x2
STX
C(S)+B
DC2
C(S)+R
x3
ETX
C(S)+C
DC3
C(S)+S
x4
EOT
C(S)+D
DC4
C(S)+T
x5
ENQ
C(S)+E
NAK
C(S)+U
X6
ACK
C(S)+F
SYN
C(S)+V
x7
BEL
C(S)+G
ETB
C(S)+W
x8
BS
CAN
C(S)+X
x9
HT
TAB
EM
C(S)+Y
xA
LF
C(S)+J
SUB
C(S)+Z
xB
VT
C(S)+K
ESC
Esc
xC
FF
C(S)+L
FS
C+\
xD
CR
Enter
GS
C+]
xE
SO
C(S)+N
RS
C+^
xF
SI
C(S)+O
US
C(S)+_
2x
SP
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
3x
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
4x
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
5x
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
6x
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
7x
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
Del
8x
€
Sh↓
Sh↑
Ins
Ent
(keyp)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
9x
F12
Home
End
Pg Up
Pg Dwn




Ar↓
Ar↑
Al↓
Al ↑
Cl ↓
Cl ↑
Cr ↓
Ax
Cr ↑
‘
ƒ
„
…
†
‡
ˆ
‰
Š
‹
Ś
‹
Œ
Bx
°
±
²
³
´
µ
¶
¸
¹
º
»
¼
½
¾
¿
Cx
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
Í
Î
Ï
Dx
Ð
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
×
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
Ý
Þ
ß
Ex
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
í
î
ï
Fx
ð
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
ý
þ
ÿ
·
Extended characters (sky blue) are sent through dedicated keys (when available in the selected country mode) or by using an Alt Mode sequence.
356
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Interface Type PC AT PS/2, USB-Keyboard or USB-Keyboard for APPLE — cont.
Table 54. Scancode Set When Control Character is 02
0x
x0
x1
x2
x3
x4
x5
X6
x7
x8
x9
xA
xB
Ar↓
Ar↑
Al↓
Al ↑
Cl ↓
Cl ↑
Cr ↓
Cr ↑
BS
Tab

S+ Tab
Home



xC
Enter
Keypd
xD
xE
xF
Enter
Ins
Pg Up
1x
Pg Dwn
2x
Space
!
“
#
$
%
&
‘
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
3x
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
4x
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
5x
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
6x
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
7x
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
Del
8x
€
‘
ƒ
„
…
†
‡
ˆ
‰
Š
‹
Ś
‹
Œ
‘
’
“
”
•
–
—
˜
™
š
›
œ
§
¨
©
ª
«
¬
¸
¹
º
»
9x
F6
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
ESC
F7
F8
F9
F10
ž
Ÿ
-
®
¯
¼
½
¾
¿
Ax
NBSP
¡
¢
£
¤
¥
¦
Bx
°
±
²
³
´
µ
¶
Cx
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
Í
Î
Ï
Dx
Ð
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
×
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
Ý
Þ
ß
Ex
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
í
î
ï
Fx
ð
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
ý
þ
ÿ
Product Reference Guide
·
357
Interface type PC AT PS/2 Alt Mode or USB-Keyboard Alt Mode
Table 55. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01
x0
x1
x2
x3
x4
x5
X6
x7
x8
0x
Alt+000
Alt+001
Alt+002
Alt+003
Alt+004
Alt+005
Alt+006
Alt+007
1x
Alt+016
Alt+017
Alt+018
Alt+019
Alt+020
Alt+021
Alt+022
Alt+023
Alt+024
Alt+025
Alt+026
2x
A+032
A+033
A+034
A+035
A+036
A+037
A+038
A+039
A+040
A+041
A+042
3x
A+048
A+049
A+050
A+051
A+052
A+053
A+054
A+055
A+056
A+057
4x
A+064
A+065
A+066
A+067
A+068
A+069
A+070
A+071
A+072
5x
A+080
A+081
A+082
A+083
A+084
A+085
A+086
A+087
6x
A+096
A+097
A+098
A+099
A+100
A+101
A+102
7x
A+112
A+113
A+114
A+115
A+116
A+117
8x
€
Sh↓
Sh↑
Ins
Ent
(keyp)
9x
F12
Home
End
Pg Up
Ax
Cr ↑
A+0161
A+0162
Bx
A+0176
A+0177
Cx
A+0192
Dx
BS
x9
HT
TAB
xA
xB
Alt+010
Alt+011
ESC
Esc
xC
xD
CR
Alt+012
Enter
xE
Xf
Alt+014
Alt+015
Alt+028
Alt+029
Alt+030
Alt+031
A+043
A+044
A+045
A+046
A+047
A+058
A+059
A+060
A+061
A+062
A+063
A+073
A+074
A+075
A+076
A+077
A+078
A+079
A+088
A+089
A+090
A+091
A+092
A+093
A+094
A+095
A+103
A+104
A+105
A+106
A+107
A+108
A+109
A+110
A+111
A+118
A+119
A+120
A+121
A+122
A+123
A+124
A+125
A+126
A+127
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
Pg Dwn




Ar↓
Ar↑
Al↓
Al ↑
Cl ↓
Cl ↑
Cr ↓
A+0163
A+0164
A+0165
A+0166
A+0167
A+0168
A+0169
A+0170
A+0171
A+0172
A+0173
A+0174
A+0175
A+0178
A+0179
A+0180
A+0181
A+0182
A+0183
A+0184
A+0185
A+0186
A+0187
A+0188
A+0189
A+0190
A+0191
A+0193
A+0194
A+0195
A+0196
A+0197
A+0198
A+0199
A+0200
A+0201
A+0202
A+0203
A+0204
A+0205
A+0206
A+0207
A+0208
A+0209
A+0210
A+0211
A+0212
A+0213
A+0214
A+0215
A+0216
A+0217
A+0218
A+0219
A+0220
A+0221
A+0222
A+0223
Ex
A+0224
A+0225
A+0226
A+0227
A+0228
A+0229
A+0230
A+0231
A+0232
A+0233
A+0234
A+0235
A+0236
A+0237
A+0238
A+0239
Fx
A+0240
A+0241
A+0242
A+0243
A+0244
A+0245
A+0246
A+0247
A+0248
A+0249
A+0250
A+0251
A+052
A+0253
A+0254
A+0255
358
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Interface type PC AT PS/2 Alt Mode or USB-Keyboard Alt Mode — cont.
Table 56. Scancode Set When Control Character is 02
x0
x1
x2
x3
x4
x5
X6
x7
x8
x9
xA
0x
Ar↓
Ar↑
Al↓
Al ↑
Cl ↓
Cl ↑
Cr ↓
Cr ↑
BS
Tab

1x
Pg Dwn
Home



2x
A+032
A+033
A+034
A+035
A+036
A+037
A+038
A+039
A+040
A+041
A+042
A+043
A+044
A+045
A+046
A+047
3x
A+048
A+049
A+050
A+051
A+052
A+053
A+054
A+055
A+056
A+057
A+058
A+059
A+060
A+061
A+062
A+063
4x
A+064
A+065
A+066
A+067
A+068
A+069
A+070
A+071
A+072
A+073
A+074
A+075
A+076
A+077
A+078
A+079
5x
A+080
A+081
A+082
A+083
A+084
A+085
A+086
A+087
A+088
A+089
A+090
A+091
A+092
A+093
A+094
A+095
6x
A+096
A+097
A+098
A+099
A+100
A+101
A+102
A+103
A+104
A+105
A+106
A+107
A+108
A+109
A+110
A+111
7x
A+112
A+113
A+114
A+115
A+116
A+117
A+118
A+119
A+120
A+121
A+122
A+123
A+124
A+125
A+126
A+127
8x
A+0128
A+0129
A+0130
A+0131
A+0132
A+0133
A+0134
A+0135
A+0136
A+0137
A+0138
A+0139
A+0140
A+0141
A+0142
A+0143
9x
A+0144
A+0145
A+0146
A+0147
A+0148
A+0149
A+0150
A+0151
A+0152
A+0153
A+0154
A+0155
A+0156
A+0157
A+0158
A+0159
Ax
A+0160
A+0161
A+0162
A+0163
A+0164
A+0165
A+0166
A+0167
A+0168
A+0169
A+0170
A+0171
A+0172
A+0173
A+0174
A+0175
Bx
A+0176
A+0177
A+0178
A+0179
A+0180
A+0181
A+0182
A+0183
A+0184
A+0185
A+0186
A+0187
A+0188
A+0189
A+0190
A+0191
Cx
A+0192
A+0193
A+0194
A+0195
A+0196
A+0197
A+0198
A+0199
A+0200
A+0201
A+0202
A+0203
A+0204
A+0205
A+0206
A+0207
Dx
A+0208
A+0209
A+0210
A+0211
A+0212
A+0213
A+0214
A+0215
A+0216
A+0217
A+0218
A+0219
A+0220
A+0221
A+0222
A+0223
Ex
A+0224
A+0225
A+0226
A+0227
A+0228
A+0229
A+0230
A+0231
A+0232
A+0233
A+0234
A+0235
A+0236
A+0237
A+0238
A+0239
Fx
A+0240
A+0241
A+0242
A+0243
A+0244
A+0245
A+0246
A+0247
A+0248
A+0249
A+0250
A+0251
A+052
A+0253
A+0254
A+0255
Product Reference Guide
F6
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
xB
xC
Enter
S+ Tab
Keypd
ESC
F7
xD
xE
xF
Enter
Ins
Pg Up
F8
F9
F10
359
Digital Interface
Table 57. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01
0x
1x
X0
NULL
C+@
DLE
C(S)+P
x1
SOH
C(S)+A
DC1
C(S)+Q
x2
STX
C(S)+B
DC2
C(S)+R
x3
ETX
C(S)+C
DC3
C(S)+S
x4
EOT
C+D
DC4
C(S)+T
x5
ENQ
C(S)+E
NAK
C(S)+U
x6
ACK
C(S)+F
SYN
C(S)+V
x7
BEL
C(S)+G
ETB
C(S)+W
x8
BS
CAN
C(S)+X
x9
HT
TAB
EM
C(S)+Y
xA
LF
C(S)+J
SUB
C(S)+Z
xB
VT
C(S)+K
ESC
Esc
xC
FF
C(S)+L
FS
C(S)+\
xD
CR
Enter
GS
C+]
xE
SO
C(S)+N
RS
C(S)+^
xF
SI
C(S)+O
US
C(S)+_
2x
Space
!
“
#
$
%
&
‘
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
3x
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
4x
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
5x
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
6x
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
7x
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
Del
Sh↓
Sh↑
Ins
Ent
(keyp)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F13
F14
F15
F16




Cl ↓
Cl ↑
x4
x5
x6
x7
x8
x9
xA
xB
xC
xD
xE
Cl ↓
Cl ↑
BS
Tab
à
S+ Tab
Enter
Keypd
Enter
Ins
8x
9x
F12
Table 58. Scancode Set When Control Character is 02
X0
x1
x2
x3
0x
1x



F6
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
ESC
F7
F8
F9
xF
F10
2x
Space
!
“
#
$
%
&
‘
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
3x
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
4x
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
5x
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
6x
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
7x
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
Del
360
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
IBM31xx 102-key
Table 59. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01
0x
1x
X0
NULL
C+@
DLE
C(S)+P
x1
SOH
C(S)+A
DC1
C(S)+Q
x2
STX
C(S)+B
DC2
C(S)+R
x3
ETX
C(S)+C
DC3
C(S)+S
x4
EOT
C+D
DC4
C(S)+T
x5
ENQ
C(S)+E
NAK
C(S)+U
x6
ACK
C(S)+F
SYN
C(S)+V
x7
BEL
C(S)+G
ETB
C(S)+W
x8
BS
CAN
C(S)+X
x9
HT
TAB
EM
C(S)+Y
xA
LF
C(S)+J
SUB
C(S)+Z
xB
VT
C(S)+K
ESC
Esc
xC
FF
C(S)+L
FS
C(S)+\
xD
CR
Enter
GS
C+]
xE
SO
C(S)+N
RS
C(S)+^
xF
SI
C(S)+O
US
C(S)+_
2x
Space
!
“
#
$
%
&
‘
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
3x
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
4x
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
5x
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
6x
‘
a
B
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
7x
p
q
R
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
Sh↓
Sh↑
Ins
Ent
(keyp)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
Enter
Reset
Insert
Delete
Field -
Field +
Enter
paddle
Printl
Ar↓
Ar↑
Al↓
Al ↑
Cl ↓
Cl ↑
Cr ↓
xC
Enter
Keypd
xD
xE
xF
Enter
Ins
Pg Up
8x
9x
F12
Ax
Cr ↑
Del
Table 60. Scancode Set When Control Character is 02
X0
x1
x2
x3
x4
x5
x6
x7
x8
x9
xA
xB
0x
Ar↓
Ar↑
Al↓
Al ↑
Cl ↓
Cl ↑
Cr ↓
Cr ↑
BS
Tab

S+ Tab
1x
Pg Dwn
Home



F6
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
ESC
F7
F8
F9
F10
2x
Space
!
“
#
$
%
&
‘
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
3x
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
4x
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
5x
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
6x
‘
a
B
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
7x
p
q
R
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
Product Reference Guide
Del
361
IBM XT
Table 61. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01
0x
1x
X0
NULL
C+@
DLE
C(S)+P
x1
SOH
C(S)+A
DC1
C(S)+Q
x2
STX
C(S)+B
DC2
C(S)+R
x3
ETX
C(S)+C
DC3
C(S)+S
x4
EOT
C+D
DC4
C(S)+T
x5
ENQ
C(S)+E
NAK
C(S)+U
x6
ACK
C(S)+F
SYN
C(S)+V
x7
BEL
C(S)+G
ETB
C(S)+W
x8
BS
C(S)+H
CAN
C(S)+X
x9
HT
TAB
EM
C(S)+Y
xA
LF
C(S)+J
SUB
C(S)+Z
xB
VT
C(S)+K
ESC
Esc
xC
FF
C(S)+L
FS
C(S)+\
xD
CR
Enter
GS
C+]
xE
SO
C(S)+N
RS
C(S)+^
xF
SI
C(S)+O
US
C(S)+_
2x
Space
!
“
#
$
%
&
‘
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
3x
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
4x
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
5x
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
6x
‘
a
B
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
7x
p
q
R
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
Sh↓
Sh↑
Ins
Ent
(keyp)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
Home
End
Pg Up
Pg Dwn




Ar↓
Ar↑
Al↓
Al ↑
Cl ↓
Cl ↑
Cr ↓
x4
x5
x6
x7
x8
x9
xA
xB
xC
xD
xE
xF
S+ Tab
Enter
Keypd
Enter
Ins
Pg Up
8x
9x
F12
Ax
Cr ↑
Del
Table 62. Scancode Set when Control Character 02
X0
x1
x2
x3
0x
Ar↓
Ar↑
Al↓
Al ↑
Cl ↓
1x
Pg Dwn
Home



Cl ↑
F6
Cr ↓
F1
Cr ↑
F2
BS
F3
Tab
F4

F5
ESC
F7
F8
F9
F10
2x
Space
!
“
#
$
%
&
‘
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
3x
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
4x
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
5x
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
6x
‘
a
B
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
7x
p
q
R
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
362
Del
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Scancode Tables
Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252
Windows-1252 is a character encoding of the Latin alphabet, used by default in the
legacy components of Microsoft Windows in English and some other Western
languages.
Product Reference Guide
363
Scancode Tables
NOTES
364
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
Index
A
Aladdin™
G
16
B
barcodes
cancel 351
numeric barcodes 351
RS-232
baud rate 65
RS-232 parameters
parity 59, 177, 251, 252, 255
battery
WARNINGS 15
Beeper
Pitch, Good Read 97
Volume, Good Read 99
Beeper, Good Read 96
C
Cable Pinouts 330
Clear to Send 291
Code 39 Format 72
Conversion, case 90
Conversion, character 90, 311
Convert to Code 128 76
Convert to Code 39 76
Coupon Control 109
CTS 291
H
Handheld Scanner
Host Resets 70
68
I
IBM interface selection 30
IBM Standard Format 72
Idle State (wand) 75
Indications 331
Interface Cable 18
ISSN 120
K
keyboard support 56
KEYBOARD WEDGE (KBW) interface selection
Keyboard Wedge Connection 19
31
M
D
Datalogic Aladdin™
Defaults 335
Dimensions 327
Good Read, Beeper 96
Pitch 97
Volume 99
Good Read, Beeper – 96
Good Read, Beeper Pitch – 97
Good Read, Beeper Volume – 99
Green Spot 331
16
E
Mixed OEM Standard + Code 39 Format
72
N
numbers lock key
60
Error Codes 332
Errors 332
Product Reference Guide
365
Index
P
Performance Characteristics 328
Physical Characteristics 327
Pitch – Good Read, Beeper 97
Polarity (wand) 74
Prefix/Suffix 78, 305
Product Specifications 327
Programming Barcodes 16
R
Read, Beeper – Good 96
Read, Beeper Pitch – Good 97
Read, Beeper Volume – Good 99
Reading Configuration Barcodes 38
Request to Send 291
RS-232 interface selection 30
RS-232 Serial Connection 18
RTS 291
S
sample barcodes
code 128 347
code 39 347
interleaved 2 of 5 348
Scancode Tables 355
select digits/characters 351
Serial Output 330
Signal Speed (wand) 74
366
Standard Cable Pinouts
Suffix 78, 305
Symbology Conversion
symbology types 347
330
76
T
Table Top Scanner
68
U
UPC 110
USB Connection 19
USB interface selection
30
V
Volume – Good Read, Beeper
99
W
Weight
327
X
XON/XOFF
292
Gryphon™ I GD4100/GM4100/GBT4100/L GD4300
ASCII Chart
ASCII
Char.
Hex
No.
ASCII
Char.
Hex
No.
ASCII
Char.
Hex
No.
ASCII
Char.
Hex
No.
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
SP
!
“
#
$
%
&
’
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
‘
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
DEL
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
www.datalogic.com
©2011-2016 Datalogic, Inc. All rights reserved. Datalogic and the
Datalogic logo are registered trademarks of Datalogic S.p.A. in many
countries, including the U.S.A. and the E.U.
Datalogic ADC, Inc.
959 Terry Street | Eugene |OR 97402 | USA
Telephone: (1) 541-683-5700 | Fax: (1) 541-345-7140
820050514
(Rev H)
February 2016
Download PDF